Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For

69NT40-541-500 to 599
Container Refrigeration Units

T-363 Rev E
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For

69NT40-541-500 to 599

© Carrier Corporation, 2021 Printed in U. S. A. January 2021

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Number Page

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.3 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.4 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.5 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.6 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.7 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.8 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.9 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.3.10 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.4 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.6 Quest - CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.8 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.9 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.10 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.11 Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.12 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.13 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.14 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.15 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.16 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.17 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.18 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.19 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.20 Emergency Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.21 eAutoFresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.22 XtendFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

i T-363
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.1.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.7 Communications Interface Module (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.1 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.2 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.3 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.4 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.5 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.6 Perishable Mode Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.7 Perishable, Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.8 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.9 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.10 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.11 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.12 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.13 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.14 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.15 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.16 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.17 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.18 Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.19 Defrost Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.2 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.4 Condenser Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.5 QUEST - CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15

T-363 ii
 4.7 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.1 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.8.2 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.8.3 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.4 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.5 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.6 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.7 DataCORDER Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.8 Pre-trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.9 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.10 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.8.12 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.8.13 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
4.12 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–50
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.2 Connection to 190/230VAC Power (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.5 XTENDFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.8 START-UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.8.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.8.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.8.3 Start Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.8.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.9 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.10 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.11 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.12 TRIPWISE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.12.1 Checking TripWise Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.12.2 Enabling or Disabling TripWise Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.12.3 TripWise Status Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.13 AUTOMATIC COLD TREATMENT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.14 AUTOMATIC SETPOINT CHANGE (ASC) CD53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13

iii T-363
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY LONG IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES (COOLING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.12 THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 SERVICE VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.4 PUMP THE UNIT DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.3 Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.4 Procedure - Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.8 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8.2 Compressor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.8.3 Compressor Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.8.4 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.8.5 Installing the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.8.6 Compressor Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.9.2 Replacing the High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.10 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.12 FILTER-DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.13 EVAPORATOR COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19

T-363 iv
 7.14 EVAPORATOR HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.14.1 Megger Testing the Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.15 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.15.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.15.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.15.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.16 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.17 THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.17.1 Checking Superheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.17.2 TXV Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.18 SUCTION MODULATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.18.1 Pre-Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.19 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.19.1 Checking the Stepper Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.19.2 Checking the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.19.3 SMV Emergency Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.20 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.21 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.21.1 Handling Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.21.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.21.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.21.4 Removing and Installing the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.21.5 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.22 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.22.1 Ice Bath Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.22.2 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.22.3 GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.22.4 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.22.5 Sensor Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.23 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.24 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.25 XTENDFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.26 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
7.27 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
7.27.1 Installing the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY .................................................... 9–1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX–1

v T-363
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section - Units with Center Access Panel ................................. 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section ........................................................... 3–3
Figure 3.4 Condenser Section ............................................................ 3–4
Figure 3.5 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Figure 3.6 Refrigeration Circuit with Receiver ............................................... 3–10
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System .................................................... 4–1
Figure 4.2 Keypad ..................................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.3 Display Module ............................................................... 4–3
Figure 4.4 Control Module ............................................................... 4–4
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode ............................................ 4–6
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling ....................................................... 4–8
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating ....................................................... 4–9
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode .............................................. 4–10
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode ................................................................ 4–11
Figure 4.10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Report ................................................. 4–20
Figure 4.12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Make Up Air Flow Chart ........................................................ 5–3
Figure 5.3 TripWise Status in DataCorder ................................................... 5–9
Figure 5.4 Generating TripWise Summary Report ............................................. 5–9
Figure 5.5 TripWise Summary Report ..................................................... 5–10
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set ................................................ 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve ................................................................ 7–3
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Figure 7.5 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Figure 7.6 Exploded View of Valve Plate .................................................... 7–8
Figure 7.7 Bottom Plate Removed ......................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.8 Oil Pump and Bearing Head ..................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.9 Low Profile Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
Figure 7.10 Motor End Cover ............................................................ 7–10
Figure 7.11 Equalizing Tube and Lock Screw Assembly ....................................... 7–11
Figure 7.12 Crankshaft Assembly ........................................................ 7–11
Figure 7.13 Suction Valve and Positioning Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
Figure 7.14 Piston Ring ................................................................ 7–12
Figure 7.15 High Pressure Switch Testing .................................................. 7–15
Figure 7.16 Condenser Fan Position ...................................................... 7–17
Figure 7.17 Heater Arrangement ......................................................... 7–19
Figure 7.18 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
Figure 7.19 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb ............................................. 7–24

vii T-363
Figure 7.20 Thermostatic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Figure 7.21 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
Figure 7.22 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Brazing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
Figure 7.23 Suction Modulation Valve (SMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Figure 7.24 Controller Section of the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
Figure 7.25 Supply Sensors - Cover Assembly and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
Figure 7.26 Removing Front Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
Figure 7.27 Removing Evaporator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
Figure 7.28 Return Sensors - Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
Figure 7.29 Return Sensors - Cutting Wire Ties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.30 DataLINE - Probe Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.31 DataLINE - Calibrate Sensors Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.32 DataLINE - Enter Service Center Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.33 Ice Bath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.34 DataLINE - Start Cal Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.35 DataLINE - Calibration Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Figure 7.36 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.37 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
Figure 7.38 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
Figure 7.39 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Figure 7.40 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
Figure 7.41 R-134a Compressor Pressure and Motor Current Curves Vs. Ambient Temperature, Sheet 1 . 7–51
Figure 8.1 Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.3 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.4 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

T-363 viii
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data ...................................................... 3–6

Table 3–2 Electrical Data ................................................................ 3–7
Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
Table 4–1 Keypad Function .............................................................. 4–3
Table 4–2 Data CORDER Configuration Variables ........................................... 4–19
Table 4–3 Data CORDER Standard Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications .................................................... 4–49
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes .................................................. 4–50
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–56
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records ........................................... 4–57
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–58
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays ................................................. 7–27
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS ......................... 7–34
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - PrimeLINE CPDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
Table 7–5 Wear Limits For Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Table 7–4 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Table 7–6 Compressor Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
Table 7–7 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart .................................... 7–48

ix T-363
 SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY

1.1 General Safety Notices

Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures and electrical com-
ponents. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service refrigeration equipment.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this man-
ual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance
of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three sections labeled:
First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings and cautions
appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.

1.2 First Aid

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.

1.3 Operating Precautions

Always wear safety glasses.
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and condenser fans.
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the work being undertaken.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers, start-stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.

1.4 Maintenance Precautions

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, and disconnecting and securing the power plug.
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves, and electrical control switches.
Tag circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the mod-
ules in both control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).

1.5 Specific Hazard Statements

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:
DANGER − Indicates an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING − Warns against hazards or unsafe conditions which COULD result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION − Warns against potentially hazardous or unsafe practices that could result in minor personal injury,
product or property damage.
The statements listed below are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.

1–1 T-363
 ! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s), and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

! WARNING
The unit power plug must be disconnected to remove power from circuit breaker CB1.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of any external compressor component make sure to relieve possible
internal pressure by loosening the bolts and tapping the component with a soft hammer to
break the seal.

T-363 1–2
 ! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from circuit boards unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap or equivalent static drain device.

! CAUTION
Remove the controller module and unplug all connectors before performing any arc welding
on any part of the container.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At the com-
pletion of Pre-Trip activity, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!

! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the emergency bypass switch is in the
BYPASS position and the MODE SWITCH is in the FULL COOL position. If the cargo may be
damaged by low temperatures, the operator must monitor container temperature and manually
cycle operation as required to maintain temperature within required limits.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.

! CAUTION
Removing the compressor motor press-fit stator in the field is not recommended. The rotor
and stator are a matched pair and should not be separated.

1–3 T-363
 ! CAUTION
The copper tube that connects to the oil suction strainer extends out the bottom with the bot-
tom plate removed. Take precautions to avoid bending or breaking it while changing crankcase
positions.

! CAUTION
Ensure that the thrust washer does not fall off dowel pins while installing oil pump.

! CAUTION
The set screw on the crankshaft must be removed for this type of oil pump (see Figure 7.8).

! CAUTION
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Polyol Ester Oil (POE) − Castrol-Icematic SW20 compres-
sor oil with R-134a. Buy in quantities of one quart or smaller. When using this hygroscopic oil,
immediately reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or contamination will occur.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.

! CAUTION
DO NOT disassemble piston from NEW suction modulating valve powerhead assembly. Doing
so may result in damage to piston.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.

T-363 1–4
 SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION

2.1 Introduction
The Carrier Transicold ThinLINE model 69NT40-541-500 to 599 series units are of lightweight aluminum frame
construction designed to fit in the front of a container and serve as the container’s front wall.
They are one piece, self-contained, all-electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control.
The units are suppled with a complete charge of refrigerant R-134a and compressor lubricating oil, and are ready
for operation upon installation. Forklift pockets are provided for unit installation and removal.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power. An optional autotransformer may be
fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230, 3 phase, 50/60 hertz power. Power for the control system is provided
by a transformer, which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 microprocessor. The controller operates automatically to select
cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits. The
unit may also be equipped with an electronic temperature recorder.
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also equipped with
lights to indicate various modes of operation.

2.2 Configuration Identification

Unit identification information is provided on a plate located near the compressor. The plate provides the unit model
number, the unit serial number and the unit parts identification number (PID). The model number identifies the
overall unit configuration while the PID provides information on specific optional equipment, factory provisions to
allow for field installation of optional equipment and differences in detailed parts.

2.3 Feature Descriptions

2.3.1 Control Box
Units are equipped with an aluminum control box, and may be fitted with a lockable door.
2.3.2 Controller
The unit is equipped with a Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system.
2.3.3 Temperature Readout
The unit is fitted with suction and discharge refrigerant temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be viewed
on the controller display.
2.3.4 Pressure Readout
The is fitted with suction and discharge pressure transducers. The transducer readings may be viewed on the con-
troller display.
2.3.5 Compressor
The unit is fitted with a single speed reciprocating compressor.
2.3.6 Condenser Coil
The unit is fitted with a two-row square formed condenser coil using 7mm tubing.
2.3.7 Condenser Grille
Condenser grilles are direct bolted.
2.3.8 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with a hermetic thermal expansion valve (TXV) and a heat exchanger. The unit
has six heaters.

2–1 T-363
2.3.9 Evaporator Fan Operation
Units are equipped with three-phase evaporator fan motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will
shut down the unit.
2.3.10 Plate Set
Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematic and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are ordered
using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.

2.4 Option Descriptions

Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are described in the following sub-
paragraphs.
2.4.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the standard location or in a secure location.
2.4.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In
dehumidification mode the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
2.4.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.
2.4.4 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container and
the other mounted inside the container (with the USDA receptacles).
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring
The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring receptacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators for
COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control box loca-
tion.
2.4.6 Quest - CCPC
Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state per-
ishable cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to supply / return air temperature conditions.
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module
The unit may be fitted with a communications interface module. The communications interface module is a slave
module which allows communication with a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to commu-
nication and return information over the main power line. Refer to the ship master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.
2.4.8 460 Volt Cable
Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.
2.4.9 Autotransformer
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation on 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power. The autotrans-
former raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The autotransformer
may also be fitted with an individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power. If the unit is equipped with an autotrans-
former and communications module, the autotransformer will be fitted with a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist
in communications.
2.4.10 230 Volt Cable
Units equipped with an autotransformer require an additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt source.
Various power cable and plug designs are available. The plug options tailor the cables to customer requirements.

T-363 2–2
2.4.11 Gutters
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box to divert rain away from the controls.
2.4.12 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers.
2.4.13 Thermometer Port
The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a cap and chain.
2.4.14 Back Panels
Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or hinge mounting.
2.4.15 Cable Restraint
Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor sec-
tion front cover.
2.4.16 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.4.17 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.4.18 Labels
Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels differ depending on the options installed. Labels available with
additional languages are listed in the parts list.
2.4.19 Display Module
The unit may be fitted with a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or a Light Emitting Diode (LED) Display.
2.4.20 Emergency Bypass
The optional Emergency Bypass switch (EB) functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure.
2.4.21 eAutoFresh
The optional eAutoFresh™ venting system moderates the atmospheric level inside the container unit in response
to cargo respiration.
Procedures and technical information related to the eAutoFresh™ venting system can be found in the T-342
eAutoFresh Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the manual
from the Literature section, click on Options > eAutoFresh.

2.4.22 XtendFRESH
XtendFRESH™ is an OEM option that helps slow the ripening process by removing ethylene and simultaneously
controlling CO2 and O2 levels in multiple combinations.
Procedures and technical information related to the XtendFRESH™ controlled atmosphere system can be found in
the T-366 XtendFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find
the manual from the Literature section, click on Options > XtendFRESH.

2–3 T-363
 SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION

3.1 General Description

3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section
The unit is designed so the majority of the components are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). The unit model
number, serial number, and parts identification number can be found on the serial plate to the left of the compressor.
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circula-
tion. A manually operated venting system is located in the upper left access panel. The optional eAutoFresh vent system
is to moderate the atmospheric level in the container in response to cargo respiration. When transporting frozen cargo
loads the vent will be closed. The upper left access panel contains the vent slide and motor assembly. It may be removed
to allow entry into the evaporator section where the CO2 sensor and drive pack are located.
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

1
2

7
15
8

14

13 12 11 10
1. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel / Evap Fan #2 7. Remote Monitoring Receptacle (option)
(Inside panel includes DTS, HS and RTS. Refer to 8. Start-Stop Switch (ST)
Figure 3.2) 9. Interrogator Connector
2. Access Panel for Evap Fan #1 10. Supply Temperature Sensor / Supply Recorder
(Inside panel includes TXV, TXV Bulb, and HTT. Sensor (STS / SRS)
Refer to Figure 3.2)
11. Compressor
3. Fork Lift Pockets
12. Condenser Fan
4. Control Box
13. Power Cables and Plug location
5. Unit Display
14. Autotransformer location (option)
6. Keypad
15. Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent location
-----

3–1 T-363
3.1.3 Evaporator Section
The evaporator section is shown below. The evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling it in the
top of the unit, directing it through the evaporator coil where it is heated or cooled, and discharging it at the bottom.
If the unit is equipped with eAutoFresh, system components are mounted in addition to the standard refrigeration
unit components. The stepper motor component is installed in the vent; the air filter, CO2 sensor, stepper motor
drive and CO2 sensing lines are installed on the rib of the upper grill.
Most evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel (as shown in the illustration) or by
removing the evaporator fan access panels (see Figure 3.1).

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section - Units with Center Access Panel

3
10
11
1 2
4

12

13
14 9
8
7 5
15 6

16

1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 9. Heat Exchanger

2. Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) / Return Tempera- 10. Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
ture Sensor (RTS) 11. TXV Bulb
3. Humidity Sensor (HS) 12. Interrogator Connector Rear (ICR)
4. Evaporator Fan Motor #2 13. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
5. Evaporator Coil 14. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
6. Evaporator Coil Heaters 15. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
7. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) 16. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
8. Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT)
-----

T-363 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section
The compressor section includes the compressor (with high pressure switch), power cable storage compartment,
and autotransformer. This section also contains the quench valve, suction modulating valve, discharge pressure
regulating valve, discharge temperature sensor, and discharge/suction pressure transducers. The supply tempera-
ture sensor, supply recorder sensor, and ambient sensor are located at the right side of the compressor.
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section

12
3
11 4
5

10 9 8 7

16

13
15
14

1. Quench Valve 9. Compressor Sight Glass View Port

2. Suction Modulating Valve 10. Discharge Pressure Transducer
3. Suction Temperature Sensor 11. Discharge Service Valve
4. Quench Valve Temperature Bulb 12. High Pressure Switch
5. Ambient Sensor 13. Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
6. Suction Service Valve 14. Supply Recorder Sensor (SRS)
7. Suction Pressure Transducer 15. Power Cables and Plug
8. Compressor 16. Autotransformer
-----

3–3 T-363
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section
The air-cooled condenser section (Figure 3.4) consists of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver with sight glass/
moisture indicator, quench valve, liquid line service valve, filter-drier, condenser pressure transducer, and fusible plug.
The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and discharges it horizontally through the condenser fan grille.
Figure 3.4 Condenser Section

2
3
4
5 9

10

11

12

13

1. Condenser Coil 8. Quench Valve

2. Sight Glass 9. Fusible Plug
3. Condenser Pressure Transducer 10. Condenser Fan Motor
4. Receiver 11. Condenser Fan
5. Sight Glass/Moisture Indicator 12. Condenser Grille
6. Filter-Drier 13. Condenser Coil Cover
7. Liquid Line Service Valve
-----

T-363 3–4
3.1.6 Control Box Section
The control box (Figure 3.5) includes the manual operation switches, circuit breaker (CB-1), compressor, fan and
heater contactors, control power transformer, current sensor module, controller module and the communications
interface module.

3.1.7 Communications Interface Module (option)

The communications interface module is a slave module which allows communication between the refrigeration
unit and a ship system master central monitoring station. The module will respond to communication, and return
information over the ships main power line. Refer to the master system technical manual for further information.

Figure 3.5 Control Box Section

2 3 4
1

14

13 12 11 10 9 8

1. Compressor Contactor - CH 8. Controller Battery Pack (Standard Location)

2. Compressor Phase A Contactor - PA 9. Control Transformer
3. Compressor Phase B Contactor - PB 10. High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor - EF
4. Heater Contactor - HR 11. Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor - ES
5. Controller / DataCORDER Module (Controller) 12. Condenser Fan Contactor - CF
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 13. Circuit Breaker (CB1) - 460V
7. Start-Stop Switch, ST 14. Current Sensor Module
-----

3–5 T-363
3.2 Refrigeration System Data
Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data
Number of Cylinders 6
Model 06DR
CFM 41
Weight (Dry) 118kg (260 lb)
a. Compressor/Motor
Assembly Approved Oil Castrol Icematic
Oil Charge degrees 3.6 liters (7.6 U.S. pints)
Oil Sight Glass The oil level range, with the compressor off, should
be between the bottom and one-eighth level of the
sight glass.
b. Expansion Valve Super- Verify at -18°C (0°F) container 4.4 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
heat box temperature

c. Heater Termination Opens 54° (+/- 3) C = 130° (+/- 5) F

Thermostat Closes 38° (+/- 4) C = 100° (+/- 7) F
Cutout 25 (+/- 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/- 10) psig
d. High Pressure Switch
Cut-In 18 (+/- 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/- 10) psig

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.

Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.

Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
e. Refrigerant R-134a Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifications.
Unit Configuration Charge Requirements - R-134a
f. Refrigerant Charge
Receiver 3.3 kg (7.3 lbs)

NOTE
When replacing components (g.) and (h.), refer to installation instructions included with replacement
part.
Melting point 99°C = (210°F)
g. Fusible Plug, Receiver*
Torque* 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
h. Sight Glass / Moisture Torque 8.9 to 9.7 mkg (65 to 70 ft-lbs)
Indicator
Condenser Fan Starts Condenser fan will start if condenser pressure is
greater than 14.06 kg/cm2 (200 psig) OR the con-
i. Condenser Pressure denser fan is OFF for more than 60 seconds.
Transducer Condenser Fan Stops Condenser fan will stop if condenser pressure is less
than 9.14 kg/cm2 (130 psig) AND the condenser fan
remains ON for at least 30 seconds.
j. Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
* Rupture Disc, part number 14-00215-04 may be installed as an alternate for the receiver mounted fusible plug.

T-363 3–6
3.3 Electrical Data
Table 3–2 Electrical Data
CB-1 Trips at 29 amps
a. Circuit Breaker CB-2 (50 amps) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB-2 (70 amps) Trips at 87.5 amps
17.6 amps @ 460 VAC
b. Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA)
(with current limiting set at 21 amps)
Nominal Supply 380 VAC, Three Phase, 460 VAC, Three Phase,
50 Hz 60 Hz
Full Load Amps 0.71 amps 0.72 amps
Horsepower 0.21 hp 0.36 hp
c. Condenser Fan
Motor Rotations Per Minute 1450 rpm 1750 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Number of Heaters 6

d. Evaporator Coil Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC

Heaters Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath
380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz
Full Load Amps High 1.07 0.9
Speed
Full Load Amps Low Speed 0.47 0.47
Nominal Horsepower High 0.36 0.63
Speed
Nominal Horsepower Low 0.05 0.8
e. Evaporator Fan Speed
Motor(s)
Rotations Per Minute High 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
Speed
Rotations Per Minute Low 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 1.25 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 1.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A, F3B)
f. Fuses
Controller / DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
g. Vent Positioning
Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/- 10%
Sensor
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)

3–7 T-363
 Table 3–2 Electrical Data (Continued)
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 vdc
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 vdc
h. Humidity Sensor
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99V
50% 1.65V
70% 2.31V
90% 2.97V
i. Controller Setpoint Range -30 to +30°C (-22 to +86°F)

3.4 Safety and Protective Devices

Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in the following table. These
devices monitor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices
Unsafe Condition Safety Device Device Setting
Circuit Breaker (CB-1) - Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460VAC)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230VAC)
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230VAC)
Excessive current draw in Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit
Excessive current draw by Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
controller
Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector (IP-CP) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive evaporator fan Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) - Automatic Reset N/A
motor(s) winding temperature
Abnormal pressures / Fusible Plug - Receiver 99°C = (210°F)
temperatures in the high
refrigerant side
Abnormally high discharge High Pressure Switch (HPS) - Automatic Reset Open at 25kg/cm2 (350 psig)
pressure Close at 18kg/cm2 (250 psig)

T-363 3–8
3.5 Refrigeration Circuit
Starting at the compressor (see Figure 3.6), the suction gas is compressed to a higher pressure and temperature.
The gas flows out the compressor through the discharge service valve. Refrigerant gas then moves into the air-
cooled condenser, where air flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation temperature. By
removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high pressure/high temperature liquid and flows to the receiver,
which stores the additional charge necessary for low temperature operation.
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line service valve, the filter-drier (which keeps refrigerant clean
and dry), and a heat exchanger (that increases sub-cooling of the liquid) to the thermostatic expansion valve
(TXV).
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of the TXV, the pressure drops to suction pressure. In
this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liquid. The liquid
exits as a low pressure, low temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the return air by the balance of
the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the suction tube back to the
compressor.
The TXV is activated by the bulb strapped to the suction line near the evaporator outlet. The valve maintains a con-
stant superheat at the coil outlet regardless of load conditions.
The TXV is a mechanical device that regulates the flow of liquid to the evaporator coil in order to maintain a rela-
tively constant degree of superheat in the gas leaving the evaporator regardless of suction pressure.
The flow of liquid to the evaporator is regulated by a variable orifice which opens to increase refrigerant flow
(decrease superheat), or closes to decrease refrigerant flow (increase superheat). The variable orifice is controlled
by the temperature sensing bulb which is strapped to the suction line near the evaporator outlet.
During periods of low load, the suction modulating valve (SMV) decreases flow of refrigerant to the compressor.
This action balances the compressor capacity with the load and prevents operation with low coil temperatures. In
this mode of operation, the quench valve will open as required to provide sufficient liquid refrigerant flow into the
suction line for cooling of the compressor motor. The quench valve senses refrigerant condition entering the com-
pressor and modulates the flow to prevent entrance of liquid into the compressor.
The refrigeration system is also fitted with a condenser pressure transducer, which feeds information to the control-
ler. The controller programming will operate the condenser fan so as to attempt to maintain discharge pressures
above 130psig in low ambients. At ambients below 27°C (80°F), the condenser fan will cycle on and off depending
on condenser pressure and operating times.

1. The condenser fan will start if the condenser pressure is greater than 200 psig OR the condenser fan has
been OFF for more than 60 seconds.

2. The condenser fan will stop if the condenser pressure is less than 130 psig AND the condenser fan has been
running for at least 30 seconds.

At ambients above 27°C (80°F), condenser pressure control is disabled and the condenser fan runs continuously.

3–9 T-363
 Figure 3.6 Refrigeration Circuit with Receiver

EVAPORATOR
TXV BULB

THERMOSTATIC
EXPANSION VALVE (TXV)

CONDENSER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
FUSIBLE
PLUG
SIGHT GLASS

SIGHT GLASS / FILTER QUENCH VALVE

MOISTURE INDICATOR DRIER

RECEIVER LIQUID LINE

VALVE

DISCHARGE

QUENCH
SERVICE VALVE BULB
VALVE
SUCTION
MODULATION
VALVE
SUCTION

Suction
SERVICE
Liquid VALVE

Discharge

T-363 3–10
 SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR
4.1 Temperature Control Microprocessor System
The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display mod-
ule, control module (controller), and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control software
and the DataCORDER Software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components as
required to provide the desired cargo temperature and humidity.
The DataCORDER software functions to record unit operating parameters and cargo temperature parameters for
future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature control software begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the DataCORDER
software is provided in Section 4.8.
The keypad and display module serve to provide user access and readouts for both of the controller functions, tem-
perature control, and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the display
module. The components are designed to permit ease of installation and removal.
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System

DISPLAY MODULE
CONTROL MODULE

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

KEYPAD

CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS Pre-trip

SOFTWARE SOFTWARE
INTERROGATION
CONNECTOR

CONFIGURATION FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY
CODE (Cd)
(CnF##)

DataCORDER SOFTWARE

Computer Device
With DataLINE
DATA Software
CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS STORAGE
SOFTWARE SOFTWARE MEMORY

Operation/Config.
CONFIGURATION TO PCMCIA CARD
FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY Data Bank
CODE (dC)
(dCF## read only) (Scrollback) PCMCIA CARD

4–1 T-363
4.1.1 Keypad
The keypad (Figure 4.2) is mounted on the control box door. The keypad consists of 11 push button switches that
act as the user’s interface with the controller. Descriptions of the switch functions are provided in Table 4–1.
Figure 4.2 Keypad

CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP

MANUAL
ALARM
DEFROST/
LIST
INTERVAL

ENTER

RETURN C
SUPPLY F

BATTERY ALT
POWER MODE

4.1.2 Display Module

The display module (Figure 4.3) consists of five digital displays and seven indicator lights. Indicator lights include:
1. COOL - White or Blue LED: Energized when the refrigerant compressor is energized.
2. HEAT - Orange LED: Energized to indicate heater operation in heat mode, defrost mode, or dehumidifica-
tion.
3. DEFROST - Orange LED: Energized when the unit is in the defrost mode.
4. IN RANGE - Green LED: Energized when the controlled temperature probe is within specified tolerance of
set point.

NOTE
The controlling probe in perishable range is the SUPPLY air probe and the controlling probe in frozen
range is the RETURN air probe.
5. SUPPLY - Yellow LED: Energized when the supply air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the supply air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification or humidification is enabled.
6. RETURN - Yellow LED: Energized when the return air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the return air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification or humidification is enabled.
7. ALARM - Red LED: Energized when an active or an inactive shutdown alarm is in the alarm queue

T-363 4–2
.
Table 4–1 Keypad Function
Key Function
CODE SELECT Accesses function codes.
PRE TRIP Displays the pre-trip selection menu.
Discontinues pre-trip in progress.
ALARM LIST Displays alarm list and clears the alarm queue.
MANUAL DEFROST / Displays selected defrost mode. Depressing and holding the Defrost
INTERVAL interval key for five seconds will initiate defrost using the same logic
as if the optional manual defrost switch was toggled on.
ENTER Confirms a selection or saves a
selection to the controller.
Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection upward.
Pre-trip advance or test interruption.
Arrow Down Change or scroll a selection downward. Pre-trip repeat backward
RETURN / SUPPLY Displays non-controlling probe temperature (momentary display).
Celsius / Fahrenheit Displays alternate English/Metric scale (momentary display). When set
to degrees Fahrenheit, pressure is displayed in psig and vacuum in “/
hg. “P” appears after the value to indicate psig and “i” appears for
inches of mercury.
When set to degrees Celsius, pressure readings are in bars. “b”
appears after the value to indicate bars.
BATTERY POWER Initiate battery backup mode to allow set point and function code
selection if AC power is not connected.
ALT MODE This key is pressed to switch the functions from the temperature
software to the DataCORDER Software. The remaining keys
function the same as described above except the readings or
changes are made to the DataCORDER programming.

Figure 4.3 Display Module

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

4.1.3 Controller

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the
container.

4–3 T-363
 ! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

NOTE
Do not attempt to service the controller. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.

The Micro-Link 3 controller is a single module microprocessor as shown in Figure 4.4. It is fitted with test points,
harness connectors and a software card programming port.

4.2 Controller Software

The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into the configuration software and the
operational software. The controller software performs the following functions:
a. Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, econo-
mized operation, unloaded operation, electric heat control, and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup of
frost and ice to ensure proper air flow across the evaporator coil.
b. Provide default independent readouts of set point and supply or return air temperatures.
c. Provide ability to read, and if applicable, modify the configuration software variables, operating software function
codes, and alarm code indications.
d. Provide a Pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigeration unit performance, including proper component operation,
electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting, and current
limiting settings.
e. Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and set points without AC power connected.
f. Provide the ability to reprogram the software through the use of a memory card.

4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)

The configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software. This
software is factory-installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase order.
Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a physical
change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is pro-
vided in Table 4–4. Change to the factory-installed configuration software is achieved via a configuration card or by
communications.
Figure 4.4 Control Module

1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3

CONTROLLER With EN12830

(7.5A)

(7.5A)
(5A)

KB
(5A)
MA

OC1
F3A
MC
MB

F3B

KA
TP

KH
F2

F1

CARRIER
Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW: 1035 12-00579-00
T B C1 KE KD KC 59980

1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro-Link 3 Controller 6. Control Circuit Power Connection (located on back
3. Connectors of controller)
4. Test Points 7. Software Programming Port
8. Battery Pack
-----

T-363 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)
The operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates com-
ponents in accordance with current unit operation conditions and selected modes of operation.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only, while the remaining codes may
be user configured. The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired
mode of operation. A list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–5.
To access the function codes:

a. Press CODE SELECT, then press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired function code.

b. The right window will display the selected function code value for five seconds before returning to the default
display mode.

c. If additional time is required, pressing the ENTER key will extend the display time to 30 seconds.

4.3 Modes of Operation

General operation sequences for cooling, heating, and defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. Sche-
matic representation of controller actions are provided in Figure 4.5 & Figure 4.8.
Operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature sensors and pressure
transducers, the temperature set point, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments.
The action taken by the operational software changes as the input values change. Overall interaction of the inputs is
described as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode. Descrip-
tions of the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub paragraphs.

4.3.1 Perishable Mode Temperature Control

The unit is capable of maintaining supply air temperature to within +/- 0.25°C (+/- 0.5°F) of set point. Supply air
temperature is controlled by positioning of the suction modulation valve (SMV), cycling of the compressor, and
cycling of the heaters.
In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY indicator light is
illuminated and the default reading on the display window is the supply temperature sensor reading.
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -5°C (+23°F).

4.3.2 Perishable Pulldown

When the system is in Perishable Pulldown Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set
point. When cooling from a temperature that is more than 5°C (9°F) above set point, the system will be in Perish-
able Pulldown Mode, and the SMV will open to reduce the pulldown time.
However, pressure and current limit functions may restrict the valve if either exceeds the preset limits.

4.3.3 Perishable Steady State

Perishable Steady State is used to maintain the control temperature near a setpoint that is above the heat lockout
temperature.
The operational software is designed so the SMV will begin to close as the set point is reached. The SMV will con-
tinue to close and restrict refrigerant flow until the capacity of the unit and the load are balanced.
If the temperature drops below the set point, the compressor will remain running for a few minutes. This is to
accommodate any initial undershoot which might occur. After this time has expired and the temperature is 0.2°C
(0.36°F) or greater below the set point, the compressor will be turned OFF.
If the temperature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the heaters will be energized. The heaters will de-energize
when the temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.36°F) below the set point. The compressor will not restart until the temperature
rises to 0.2°C (0.36°F) above the set point and three minutes have elapsed since the last compressor turn off.

4–5 T-363
4.3.4 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation
Perishable Idle Mode is used when it is unnecessary to run the compressor to maintain control temperature. If the
controller has determined that cooling is not required or the controller logic determines suction pressure is at the
low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perishable Idle Mode. During Perishable Idle Mode, the compressor is
turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises
+0.2°C above set point, the unit will transition back to perishable steady state.
4.3.5 Perishable Heating
When it is necessary to raise the control temperature, the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the tem-
perature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the heaters
will be energized. The unit will transition back to Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to 0.2°C
(0.36°F) below the set point, and the heaters will de-energize.

Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally

+5qC
(+9qF)
Cooling, Cooling
Modulating

+.20qC
Set Set
Point Cooling, Point
ï.20qC Air Circulation ï.20qC Modulating
ï.20qC ï.20qC
Air Circulation
ï.50qC
ï.50qC

Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.6 Perishable Mode Dehumidification

Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity levels inside the container. Dehumidification is activated when
a humidity value is set at Cd33. The yellow SUPPLY LED will flash ON and OFF every second to indicate that
dehumidification is active. Once dehumidification is active and the following conditions are satisfied, the controller
will activate the heat relay to begin dehumidification.
1. The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity set point (Cd33).
2. The unit is in the perishable steady state mode, and the supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F)
above set point.
3. The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has timed out.
4. Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed.

T-363 4–6
If the above conditions remain true for at least one hour, the evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low speed.
Evaporator fan speed will then switch every hour, as long as the 4 conditions are met (see Bulb Mode, Section 4.3.7
for different evaporator fan speed options).

If any condition except for item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidifica-
tion set point, the high speed evaporator fans will be energized.

During dehumidification, power is applied to the defrost heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to open
the SMV to match the increased heat load while still holding the supply air temperature very close to the set point.

Opening the SMV reduces the temperature of the evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate at which water
is condensed from the passing air. Removing water from the air reduces the relative humidity. When the relative
humidity sensed is 2% below set point, the controller de-energizes the heat relay. The controller will continue to
cycle heating to maintain relative humidity below the selected set point. If the dehumidification mode is terminated
by a condition other than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or compressor shutdown condition, the heat
relay is de-energized immediately.

Two timers are activated during dehumidification to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The heater debounce timer is started whenever the heater contac-
tor status is changed. The heat contactor remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three minutes
even if the set point criteria is satisfied.
2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation during a
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air temperature remains outside of the user selected in-range
setting for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The out-
of-range timer starts as soon as the temperature exceeds the in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.

4.3.7 Perishable, Dehumidification - Bulb Mode

Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination set points.
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once bulb mode is activated, the user may then change the dehu-
midification mode evaporator fan operation from the default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to con-
stant low or constant high speed. This is done by toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If
low speed evaporator fan operation is selected, the user has the additional capability of selecting dehumidification
set points from 60 to 95% (instead of the normal 65 to 95%).
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings. The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C (0.2°F) incre-
ments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the DTT is considered
closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from 25.6°C (78°F) down to a
10°C (50°F) setting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the same value as the
“open” setting. Bulb mode is terminated when:
1. Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
2. Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
3. The user changes the set point to one that is in the frozen range.

When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above, the evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts to “alt”
and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.
4.3.8 Perishable Economy
Economy fan mode is an extension of the Perishable Mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. Economy
fan mode is activated when Cd34 (also used for Frozen Economy Mode) is set to “ON.” Economy fan mode is used
in the transportation of temperature-tolerant cargo or non-respiration items which do not require high airflow for
removing respiration heat.
There is no active display that indicates that economy fan mode has been initiated. To check for economy fan
mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
In order to achieve economy mode, a perishable set point must be selected prior to activation. When economy
mode is active, the evaporator fans will be controlled as follows:
At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evaporator fans will run in high speed for three minutes.

4–7 T-363
After the initial three minutes, they will then be switched to low speed any time supply air temperature is within +/-
0.25°C (0.45°F) of set point and return air temperature is less than or equal to supply air temperature +3°C (5.4°F).
The fans will continue to run in low speed for one hour. At the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will switch back
to high speed and the cycle will be repeated.
4.3.9 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

NOTE
In Standard Perishable Mode, the evaporator motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan Mode, fan
speed is varied.

NOTE
In low temperature ambients, the condenser fan will be cycled by the controller to maintain proper con-
densing pressure.

a. With supply air temperature above set point and decreasing, the unit will cooling with the condenser fan
motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), evaporator fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL light illumi-
nated (see Figure 4.6).
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling
ENERGIZED
DEïENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7

POWER TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

NOTE: HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN SHOWN. FOR LOW SPEED

CONTACT TE IS DE-ENERGIZED AND CONTACT TV IS ENERGIZED

b. When supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. As the air temperature continues to fall, modulating cooling starts as the supply air temperature approaches
set point.
d. The controller continuously monitors supply air temperature. Once the supply air temperature falls below set
point and 0% SMV position is reached, the controller periodically records the supply air temperature, set
point, and time. A calculation is then performed to determine temperature drift from set point over time. If the
calculation determines that cooling is no longer required, contacts TC and TN are opened to de-energize
the compressor motor and the condenser fan motor.
e. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. The green IN-RANGE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air is within tolerance of set point.
f. When the supply air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.36°F) above set point and the three minute off time
has elapsed, relays TC and TN are energized to restart the compressor and condenser fan motor. The white
COOL light is also illuminated.

T-363 4–8
4.3.10 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation

NOTE
The unit will heat only when in the Perishable Mode, relay TH is electronically locked out when in the
Frozen Mode.
a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the system enters the heating mode
(see Figure 4.5). The controller closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.7) to allow power flow through the heat
termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The
evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
b. When the supply temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.36°F) below set point, contact TH opens to de-energize the
heaters. The HEAT light is also de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout
the container.
c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT) is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the
heating circuit if overheating occurs.

Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7

POWER TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

4.3.11 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control

In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air temperature at set point, the yellow RETURN indicator light is
illuminated, and the default reading on the display window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
When the return air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
With CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, frozen mode is active with set points at or below -10°C
(+14°F). With CnF26 set to -5°C, frozen mode is active at or below -5°C (+23°F).
When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set point.
When return air temperature is greater than 0.2°C (0.36°F) above the frozen set point and the three minute time
delay has been met, the unit will always operate at full capacity with the suction modulation valve open as allowed
by current and pressure limiting.

4–9 T-363
4.3.12 Frozen Steady State
Frozen range cargoes are not sensitive to minor temperature changes. The method of temperature control
employed in frozen range takes advantage of this fact to greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit. Tem-
perature control in frozen range is accomplished by cycling the compressor on and off as the load demand
requires. The unit will operate in the conventional frozen mode when the controller set point is at or below the fro-
zen range and Economy Mode (Cd34) is set to “OFF.”

Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally

+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)

Cooling

+.20qC
Set Point
ï.20qC

Air Circulation

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.13 Frozen Idle Mode

When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2°C (0.36°F) and the compressor has run for at least five minutes,
the unit will transition to the frozen idle mode. The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run
to circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises above set point +0.2°C, (0.36°F) the unit will transition
back to the frozen steady state mode.

NOTE
On start up of the unit, SMV will reset to a known open position. This is accomplished by assuming the
valve was fully open, driving it fully closed, resetting the percentage open to zero, then opening to a
known 21% staging position.
To prevent rapid cycling of the compressor, a three minute compressor off time must be satisfied before the com-
pressor will restart. Under a condition of rapidly changing return air temperature, the time delay may allow the
return air temperature to rise slightly above set point temperature before the compressor can restart.
4.3.14 Frozen “Heat” Mode
If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below set point, the unit will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. The evap-
orator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat from the fans is circulated through the container. The unit will
transition back to frozen steady state when the temperature rises back to the transition point.

T-363 4–10
4.3.15 Frozen Economy Mode
In order to activate economy frozen mode operation, a frozen set point temperature must be selected, and Cd34
(Economy Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is active, the system will perform normal frozen mode opera-
tions except that the entire refrigeration system, excluding the controller, will be turned off when the control tem-
perature is less than or equal to the set point -2°C (3.6°F).
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes and then
check the control temperature. If the control temperature is greater than or equal to the frozen set point +0.2°C
(0.36°F), the unit will restart the refrigeration system and continue to cool until the previously mentioned off-cycle
temperature criteria are met. If the control temperature is less than the frozen set point +0.2°C (0.36°F), the unit will
turn off the evaporator fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.

4.3.16 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

NOTES
1. In the Frozen Mode the evaporator motors run in low speed.
2. In low temperature ambients, the condenser fan will be cycled by the controller to maintain proper condens-
ing pressure, refer to Section 4.4.4.
a. When the return air temperature is above set point and decreasing, the unit will be cooling with the condenser
fan motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the white COOL light illu-
minated (see Figure 4.9).
b. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point, the green
INRANGE light is illuminated.
c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2°C (0.36°F) below set point, contacts TC and TN are opened
to de-energize the compressor and condenser fan motors. The white COOL light is also de-energized.
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container.
e. The green IN-RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the return air is within tolerance of set point.
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.36°F) above set point and the three minute off time has
elapsed, relays TC and TN are energized to restart the compressor and condenser fan motors. The white
COOL light is also illuminated.

Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7

POWER TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

4–11 T-363
4.3.17 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations depending upon the reason for
the defrost or model number configuration. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is defrost due to a probe
check cycle and the third is a snap freeze process based on the unit model configuration.
Defrosting the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, and con-
denser fan), closing the SMV, and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. During nor-
mal operation, de-icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been removed, proper
air flow has been restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
If defrost was initiated by the probe check logic, then a Probe Check is carried out after the completion of the
defrost cycle. A Probe Check is initiated only when there is an inaccuracy between the controller temperature sen-
sors. For more information on Probe Check refer to Section 5.10.
Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans turned off, and is
only carried out if configured by model number. Snap Freeze allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat from the
evaporator coils, and freezes any remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.

4.3.18 Defrost Operation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS). When the (DTS) senses a
temperature less than 10°C (50°F), the defrost options become active and the timer is engaged for the initiation of
the defrost cycle. The defrost time accumulates when the compressor is running. In the perishable mode this is the
same as real time as the compressor in general runs continuously. In frozen mode the actual time necessary to
count down to the next defrost will exceed the defrost interval depending on the compressor duty-cycle.
When the defrost mode is in the active state, defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional con-
ditions become true:
1. Manually: A manual defrost is initiated by pressing the MANUAL DEFROST / INTERVAL key for greater
than 5 seconds.
2. Timer: The Defrost Interval Timer reaches the user selectable Interval. The user-selected intervals are
(OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours, AUTO, or PuLS; factory default is 3 hours. Refer to code select CD27 (see
Table 4–5).
a. Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next
defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termina-
tion of defrost, the time will not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below 10°C (50°F). If the
reading of DTS rises above termination setting any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset
and the countdown starts over. The Auto defrost time is reset to three hours start time after every PTI ini-
tiation or trip start interval.
b. Fan Pulsing Logic is used to help prevent ice formation in the drain gutter and drain cup and ice buildup
in supply air channel by using the evaporator fans to blow the warm air onto these areas during unit
defrost. When cooling at lower setpoints, evaporator fan pulsing can be used during Defrost/De-ice
when the “PuLS” option is selected in the Defrost Interval function select code. When enabled, evapora-
tor fan pulsing will occur based on the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Tem-
perature Setting (Cd60). QUEST II also pulses the evaporator fans during Defrost/De-ice within a narrow
perishable setpoint range. The logic for each evaporator fan pulsing feature is described below.
c. After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost ter-
mination, the next time the DTS contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted.
If the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
3. If defrost is initiated due to Probe Check immediately following the defrost cycle the evaporation fans are
started and run for eight minutes to stabilize the temperature throughout the container. A probe check com-
parison is carried out at the end of the eight minute period if any sensor is found out of calibration. At this
time it is no longer used for control/reorder purposes.
4. Probe Check Logic: The logic determines that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperature values
currently reported by the supply and return probes.
5. Remote: An Initiate Defrost command is sent via communications.

T-363 4–12
 6. Delta T Logic: If the difference between return and supply air temperature (Delta T) becomes too great indi-
cating possible reduced airflow over the evaporator coil caused by ice buildup requiring a defrost.
a. In Perishable Pull Down - Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, and 90 minutes of compressor run
time have been recorded.
b. In Perishable Steady State - A baseline Delta T is recorded following the first defrost cycle after steady
state conditions are reached, (the unit is cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a
stable state for a period of five minutes). Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C
above the baseline, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
c. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C and 90 minutes of
compressor run time have been recorded.

NOTICE
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the SMV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV)
to de-energize the compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans.

The controller then closes contacts TH to supply power to the heaters. The orange DEFROST light and heat light
are illuminated and the COOL light is also de-energized.

Figure 4.10 Defrost

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
FOR FULL DIAGRAM AND
LEGEND, SEE SECTION 7

POWER TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL TO SIGNAL TO
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER

NOTE
The SMV is independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends are
located in Section 8.1.

Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above one of two model number configurable options selection,
either an upper setting of 25.6°C (78°F) which is default or lower setting of 18°C (64°F).
When the DTS reading rises to the configured setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.

4–13 T-363
4.3.19 Defrost Related Settings
IDTS Failure
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not it indicates a failed DTS, a DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS). Defrost will terminate after 1 hour.
If the DTS fails to reach is termination setting, the defrost terminate after 2 hours of operation.
Defrost Timer
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost
interval, and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle. If the save option is not selected the defrost timer will re-
initiate and begin recounting.
If CnF11 is model number configured to OFF the operator will be allowed to choose “OFF” as a defrost interval option.
If CnF64 is configured in the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units
operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator
Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is
determined using the Automatic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in
this function select code.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND
CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to “PuLS”.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT) 54°C (130°F), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL59 & AL60). If the HTT does not open and
termination does not occur within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL60 will be activated to inform of
a possible DTS failure.

4.4 Protection Modes of Operation

4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation
Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down a unit. (CnF32 set to 2EFO).

4.4.2 Failure Action

Function code Cd29, Failure Action Mode, may be operator set to allow continued operation in the event the control
sensors are reading out of range. The factory default is full system shutdown (refer to Table 4–5).

4.4.3 Generator Protection

Function codes Cd31, Stagger Start Offset Time, and Cd32, System Current Limit, may be operator set to control start-
up sequence of multiple units and operating current draw. The factory default allows on demand starting of units and
full current draw (refer to Table 4–5).

4.4.4 Condenser Pressure Control

When configuration variable CnF14 is set to “In,” the condenser pressure control logic is activated to maintain dis-
charge pressures above 130psig in low temperature ambients. The logic turns the condenser fan on or off in accor-
dance with the condenser pressure transducer reading (refer to Table 4–4) The function is enabled when the
following conditions are met:
1. The ambient sensor reading is less than or equal to 27°C (80°F), and
2. Voltage/Frequency ratio is less than or equal to 8.38.
When the above conditions are met, either pressures or timers may dictate a change of state from OFF to ON or
ON to OFF. If the condenser fan is OFF, it will be energized if saturated condensing pressure is greater than
200psig OR if the condenser fan has been OFF for a variable time period of up to 60 seconds depending on the
ambient temperature. As the ambient temperature increases, the amount of time that the condenser fan is ener-
gized will correspondingly increase towards the maximum.
If the condenser fan is ON, it will de-energize only if the saturated condensing pressure is less than 130psig and the
condenser fan has been running for a minimum of thirty seconds depending on the ambient temperature.

T-363 4–14
4.5 Quest - CCPC
Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control during steady-state perishable cool-
ing that cycles the compressor on and off according to return air temperature.
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first complete a “setpoint pulldown” phase and a “CCPC pulldown”
phase:
During setpoint pulldown supply air temperature is controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air setpoint.
During CCPC pulldown the supply air temperature is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint.
Evaporator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same lowered supply air temperature as was used during CCPC pull-
down. The compressor cycles on and off according to return air high and low limits. Depending on the fan mode of
operation selected, the evaporator fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of the time according
to the control logic.

4.6 Controller Alarms

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected range or
a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of the alarms is
provided in Table 4–6.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on line.
An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is given on
the display, but the unit will continue to run.
An alarm is indicated by flashing an alarm code on the display panel, and for some alarms, by the alarm light illuminating.
When an Alarm Occurs:
1. The red alarm light will illuminate for “20 series” alarms.
2. If a detectable problem is found to exist, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the set point on the
left display.
3. The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can be cleared.
To Display Alarm Codes:
1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the Alarm Queue.
2. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the sequence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by depressing an ARROW key.
3. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the alarm number sequentially in the queue.
4. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is the
alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive alarm.
5. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.
6. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The alarm queue may than be cleared by pressing the
ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.

NOTE
AL26 is active when all of the sensors are not responding. Check the connector at the back of the con-
troller, if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it. Then run a pretrip test (P5) to clear AL26.

4–15 T-363
4.7 Pre-Trip Diagnostics
Pre-trip diagnostics is an independent controller function that will suspend normal refrigeration controller activities and
provide preprogrammed test routines. The test routines include Auto Mode testing, which automatically performs a
pre-programmed sequence of tests or Manual Mode testing, which allows the operator to select and run any of the
individual tests.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At the com-
pletion of Pre-Trip activity, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.

A Pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or via communication, but when initiated by communication
the controller will execute the entire battery of tests (auto mode).
At the end of a pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will allow the
user to see the results for all subtests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion.
A detailed description of the pre-trip tests and test codes is provided in Table 4–7. Detailed operating instructions
are provided in Section 5.9.

4.8 DataCORDER
The Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tem-
perature recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on
the display module. The unit is also fitted with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1). A personal computer
with Carrier Transicold DataLINE software may also be used to download data and configure settings.
The resulting file uses a proprietary file format that protects it from potential tampering or altering of data. There-
fore, once downloaded, all dcx files shall be considered secured. The DataCORDER consists of:
The DataCORDER consists of:
• Configuration Software
• Operational Software
• Data Storage Memory
• Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
• Six Thermistor Inputs
• Interrogation Connections
• Power Supply (battery pack)
The DataCORDER performs the following functions:
a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and stores two years’ of data (based on one hour interval).
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.
c. Records results of Pre-trip testing.
d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control software generated data and events as follows:
• Container ID Change
• Software Upgrades
• Alarm Activity
• Battery Low (Battery Pack)
• Data Retrieval
• Defrost Start and End
• Dehumidification Start and End
• Power Loss (with and without battery pack)

T-363 4–16
 • Power Up (with and without battery pack)
• Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container USDA cold treatment and cargo probe recording)
• Return Air Temperature
• Set Point Change
• Supply Air Temperature
• Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replacement
• Real-Time Clock Modification
• Trip Start
• ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation program)
• Economy Mode Start and End
• “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-trip Start and End
• Bulb Mode Start
• Bulb Mode changes
• Bulb Mode End
• USDA Trip Comment
• Humidification Start and End
• USDA Probe Calibration
• Fresh Air Vent Position

4.8.1 DataCORDER Software

The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Operational Software, Configuration Software, and the Data Memory.
a. Operational Software (dC Function Codes)
The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are labeled
Function Codes. Controller function codes (see Table 4–8), allow the operator to examine the current input data or
stored data. To access these codes, do the following:
1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys.
2. Press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number. The right window will display the
value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode.
3. If a longer time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the time to 30 seconds.
b. Configuration Software
The configuration software controls the recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming to the
factory-installed configuration is achieved via a configuration card. Changes to the software may be made using
the DataLINE integration software.
A list of the configuration variables is provided in Table 4–2. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each variable
setting are provided in the following paragraphs.

4.8.2 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)

Two modes of operation may be configured, the Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.
a. Standard Mode
In the standard mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard configura-
tions. The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–3.
The six thermistor inputs (supply, return, USDA #1, #2, #3, and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor input will be gen-
erated by the DataCORDER. An example of a report using a standard configuration is shown in Figure 4.11.

NOTE
The DataCORDER software uses the supply and return recorder sensors. The temperature control
software uses the supply and return temperature sensors.

4–17 T-363
b. Generic Mode
The generic recording mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select
up to a total of eight data points for recording. A list of the data points available for recording follows. Changing the
configuration to generic and selecting which data points to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data
Retrieval Program.
• Control mode
• Control temperature
• Frequency
• Humidity
• Phase A current
• Phase B current
• Phase C current
• Main voltage
• Suction modulation valve percentage
• Discrete outputs
• Discrete inputs
• Ambient sensor
• Compressor suction sensor
• Compressor discharge sensor
• Return temperature sensor
• Supply temperature sensor
• Defrost temperature sensor
• Discharge pressure transducer
• Suction pressure transducer
• Condenser pressure transducer

4.8.3 Logging Interval (dCF03)

The user may configure four time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in accordance
with the real-time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time.

4.8.4 Thermistor Format (dCF04)

The user may configure the format in which the thermistor readings are recorded. The low resolution is a 1 byte format
and the normal resolution is a 2 byte format. The low resolution requires less memory and records temperature in
0.25°C (0.45°F) increments when in perishable mode or 0.5°C (0.9°F) increments when in the frozen mode. The normal
resolution records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) increments for the entire range.
Table 4–2 Data CORDER Configuration Variables
Config Title Default Option
dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2, 5, 6, 9, 54, 64, 94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15, 30, 60, 120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Low, Normal
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A, b, C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere / Humidity Sampling Type A A, b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off
dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off

T-363 4–18
 Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Report

Raw Data Report for ABCU1234567

Aug 22, 2012 to Sept 05, 2012
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On Sept 05, 2012
Extracted by DataLine Rev 2.1

Controller Software: 5154

Controller Serial #: 04163552
Bill of Lading #: 1

Origin: Origin Date:

Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLine Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
__________________________________________________________________________________
Aug 22, 2012
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04163552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution

F1=Help 234567aa.dcx ML3 ABCU1234567 04163552 08/22/2012 09/05/2012

Container: ABCU1234567, Serial: 04163552

Aug 22, 2012
Aug 23, 2012

Aug 24, 2012

Aug 25, 2012

Aug 26, 2012

F1=Help 234567aa.dcx ML3 ABCU1234567 04163552 08/22/2012 09/05/2012

4–19 T-363
 Table 4–3 Data CORDER Standard Configurations
Standard Config Description
2 sensors (dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
5 sensors (dCF02=5)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
6 sensors (dCF02=6) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
9 sensors (dCF02=9) Not Applicable
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
6 sensors (dCF02=54) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
7 sensors (dCF02=64)
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)

4.8.5 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available -average, snapshot, and USDA. When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, the supply and return temperature
readings are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.

4.8.6 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10)

The USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, then the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, then the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep their
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, then all of the alarms are enabled
and the remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.
The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a pre-trip test (refer to Section 4.7) and the results of each of the
tests included in pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to
Table 4–9 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding pre-trip test.

4.8.7 DataCORDER Power-Up

The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of four ways:
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the stop-start switch.
2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for commu-
nication when an interrogation cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
3. External DC battery pack power: A 12-volt battery pack may also be plugged into the back of the interroga-
tion cable, which is then plugged into an interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required with this
method.
4. Real-time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not
present, the DataCORDER will power up when the real-time clock indicates that a data recording should
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the Controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real-time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.

T-363 4–20
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, the battery pack
needs replacement.
4.8.8 Pre-trip Data Recording
The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip test (refer to Section 4.7) and the results of each of the
tests included in pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to
Table 4–9 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding pre-trip test.
4.8.9 DataCORDER Communications
Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accomplished by using the DataLINE, DataBANK Card, or a commu-
nications interface module.

NOTE
A DataLINE or a communications interface module display of Communication Failed is caused by
faulty data transfer between the datacorder and the data retrieval device. Common causes include:
1. Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER and data retrieval device.
2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or mis-assigned.
Communication identification for the models covered herein may be obtained on the Container Products Group
Information Center by authorized Carrier Transicold Service Centers.
a DataLine
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This software allows
interrogation, configuration variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, cold treat-
ment probe calibration, and file management. Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed expla-
nation of the DataLINE interrogation software. The DataLine manual may be found on the Internet at
www.container.carrier.com.
c. DataBANK Card
The DataBANK™card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces with the controller through the programming slot and can
download data at a fast rate. Files downloaded to DataBANK card files are accessible through an Omni PC Card
Drive. The files can then be viewed using the DataLINE software.
b. Communications Interface Module
The communications interface module is a slave module which allows communication with a master central monitoring
station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the main power line. With a remote moni-
toring unit installed, all functions and selectable features that are accessible at the unit may be performed at the master
station. Retrieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be performed. Refer to the master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.
4.8.10 USDA Cold Treatment
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as an effective post harvest method for the control of Mediterra-
nean and certain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (36°F) or below for spe-
cific periods results in the mortality of the various stages of this group of insects.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this environmentally sound process, Carrier has integrated Cold
Treatment capability into its microprocessor system. These units have the ability to maintain supply air temperature
within one-quarter degree Celsius of setpoint and record minute changes in product temperature within the Data-
CORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria. Information on USDA is provided in the following subparagraphs
a. USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires three
remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to connect these
probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five receptacles
are provided. The four three-pin receptacles are for the probes and fifth, five-pin, receptacle is the rear connection
for the Interrogator. The probe receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking devices. A label
on the back panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe.
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report displays
USDA #1, #2, #3, and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by a battery so
recording can continue if AC power is lost.

4–21 T-363
b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment
A special feature is incorporated which allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message at the head of a data
report. The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure
The following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treatment:
1. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataLINE. This calibration procedure determines the probe offsets and stores them in the controller for use
in generating the cold treatment report. Refer to the Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for more details.
2. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.
3. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not already installed).
4. Place the three probes. The probes are placed into the pulp of the fruit (at the locations defined in the follow-
ing table) as the product is loaded.

Sensor 1 Place in pulp of the product located next to the return air intake.
Sensor 2 Place in pulp of the product five feet from the end of the load for 40-foot
containers, or three feet from the end of the load for 20-foot containers. This
probe should be placed in a center carton at one-half the height of the load.
Sensor 3 Place in pulp of product five feet from the end of the load for 40-foot
containers or three feet from the end of the load for 20-foot containers. This
probe should be placed in a carton at a side wall at one-half the height of the
load.

5. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and perform the configuration as follows, using
the DataLINE software:
a. Enter ISO header information.
b. Enter a trip comment if desired.
c. Configure the DataCORDER for five probes (s, r, P1, P2, P3) (dcf02=5).
d. Configure the logging interval for one hour.
e. Set the sensor configuration to “USDA”.
f. Configure for two byte memory storage format (dcf04=LONG).
g. Perform a “trip start.”

4.8.12 DataCORDER Alarms

Alarm display is an independent DataCORDER function. If an operating parameter is outside of the expected
range or a component does not return the correct signals back to the DataCORDER an alarm is generated. The
DataCORDER contains a buffer of up to eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is provided in Table 4–
10. Refer to Section 4.8.6 for configuration information.
To display alarm codes:
1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays any alarms stored in the Alarm Queue.
2. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the UP ARROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW key will scroll
the list backward.
3. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms number in the queue. The right display will show
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive
4. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive.
5. If no alarms are active, the Alarm Queue may be cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORDER
Alarm Queue Full alarm (AL91), which does not have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list. To clear
the alarm list:

T-363 4–22
 a. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.
b. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr” is displayed.
c. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
d. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left display and “-----” on the right display when there
are no alarms in the list.
e. Upon clearing of the Alarm Queue, the Alarm light will be turned off.

4.8.13 ISO Trip Header

DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/ modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the
ISO Trip Header screen. The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header”
button in the “Trip Functions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on
the “Send” button to send the modified parameter values.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or close the
utility without sending the changes made on the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a message.

4.9 Controller Configuration Variables

Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables
Config Title Default Option
CnF01 Bypass Valve Enable In 0-in, 1-out
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) 0-single, 1-dual
CnF03 Control Sensors FOUr (quad) 0-duAL, 1-quad
CnF04 Dehumidification Mode On 0-on, 1-off
CnF07 Unit Selection, 20FT / 40FT / 45FT 40ft 0-40ft, 1-20ft, 2- 45ft
CnF08 Single Phase / Three Phase Motor 1Ph 0-1phe, 1-3phe
CnF10 Two Speed Compressor Logic Out (Single) 0-single, 1-dual
CnF11 Defrost Off Selection noOFF 0-noOFF, 1-OFF
CnF12 TXV / Solenoid Quench Valve Out (TXV) 0-quench, 1-TXV
CnF13 Unloader Out 0-in, 1-out
CnF14 Condenser Pressure Control (CPC) In 0-in, 1-out
CnF15 Discharge Temperature Sensor Out 0-in, 1-out
CnF16 DataCORDER Present On (Yes) 0-off, 1-on
CnF17 Discharge Pressure Sensor Out (No) 0-out (No), 1-in (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Old (Low Watt) 0-old, 1-new (High Watt)
CnF19 Controlled Atmosphere Out (No) 0-out, 1-in (Yes)
CnF20 Suction Pressure Sensor Out (No) 0-out, 1-in (Yes)
CnF21 Autotransformer Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF22 Economy Mode Option OFF 0-off, 1-full, 2-std, 3-cust
CnF23 Defrost Interval Timer Save Option noSAv 0-no_sav, 1-sav
CnF24 Enable Long PreTrip Test Series Auto1 0-auto1, 1-auto2, 3-aAuto3

4–23 T-363
 Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables (Continued)
Config Title Default Option
CnF25 Enable PreTrip Data Recording rSLtS 0-rSLts, 1-dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Change Option Set to -10C Set to -5C
CnF27 Suction Temperature Display Option Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode Option NOr 0-normal, 1-bulb
CnF29 Enable Arctic Mode Out 0-out, 1-in
CnF30 Compressor Size 41cfm 0-41cfm, 1-37cfm
CnF31 Probe Check Option SPEC 0-Std, 1-Special
CnF32 Enable Single Evaporator Fan Option 2EF0 (dual) 0-dual, 1-single_enable
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze Option OFF 0-off, 1-snap
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display bOth (C&F) 0-enable both, 1-F, 2-C
CnF35 Enable Humidification Mode 0-OFF 1-on
CnF36 SMV Type PWM 0-PWM, 1-Spor, 2-Alco
CnF37 Electronic Temperature Recorder rEtUR 0-return, 1-supp, 2-both
CnF38 Quench Bypass Valve 0-Out 1-in
CnF39 Expanded Current Limit Range 0-Out 1-in
CnF40 Demand Defrost 0-Out 1-in
CnF41 Lower DTT Setting 0-Out 1-in
CnF42 Enable Auto Pretrip Start 0-Out 1-in
CnF43 Pulldown Defrost 0-Out 1-in
CnF44 Autoslide Enabled 0-Out 1-Lo, 2-Up
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled 0-Out 1-in
CnF47 Fresh Air Vent Position Sensor 0-Out 1-up, 2-low, 3-cust
CnF48 CFS / WPS Override 0-Out 1-in
CnF49 OEM Reset Option 0-Off 1-std, 2-spec, 3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Selection 0-Out 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0-Out 1-in
CnF54 Remote Evaporator 0-Out 1-in
CnF60 Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling 0-Out 1-in
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0-Out 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0-Out 1-in
CnF63 CCPC Pre-trip / Tripstart Default State 0-On 1-off
CnF64 Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic Enable 0-In 1-out
CnF66 High Speed Evaporator Fan Option 0-off 1-on
CnF67 Air Heaters 0-out 1-in
CnF68 Enable Default Pulsing Temperature 0-out 1-in

Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.

T-363 4–24
4.10 Controller Function Codes
Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions - Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Cd01 Capacity Modulation (%) Displays the SMV percent open. The right display reads 100% when the valve
is fully open and 0% when the valve is fully closed. The valve will usually be at
21% on start up of the unit except in very high ambient temperatures.
Cd02 Quench Valve State Displays the state of the solenoid quench valve, open or closed.
Cd03 Suction Solenoid Valve
Displays the state of the suction solenoid valve, open or closed.
State
Cd04 Line Current, Phase A The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg
Cd05 Line Current, Phase B is calculated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for
control and diagnostic purposes.
Cd06 Line Current, Phase C
For control processing, the highest of the Phase A and B current values is
used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic processing, the current
draws are used to monitor component energy.
Whenever a heater or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/
reduction for that activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to
determine if it falls within the expected range of values for the component.
Failure of this test will result in a pretrip failure or a control alarm indication.
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Main Power Frequency The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency
dis played will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (see alarm code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Air The Ambient Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd10 Compressor Suction The Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd11 Compressor Discharge The Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor reading is displayed.
Temperature
Cd12 Compressor Suction The Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer reading is displayed.
Port Pressure
Cd13 Condenser Pressure The Condenser Pressure Control Sensor reading is displayed.
Control (CPC) Sensor
Cd14 Compressor Discharge The Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer reading is displayed.
Pressure
Cd15 Digital Unloader Valve Not used in this application
Cd16 Compressor Motor Hour This code displays the compressor motor hours. User can view unit run time
Meter / Unit Run Time by pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are recorded in
Hour Meter increments of 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
The Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by pressing and
holding the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot
be reset
Cd17 Relative Humidity (%) Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity,
as a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision
The software revision number is displayed.
Number

4–25 T-363
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd19 Battery Check This code checks the Controller / DataCORDER battery pack. While the test
is running, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. PASS
will be displayed for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. FAIL will be
displayed for battery voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and ----- will be
displayed for battery voltages less than 4.5 volts. After the result is displayed
for four seconds, “btest” will again be displayed, and the user may continue to
scroll through the various codes.
Cd20 Config/Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is
con figured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40541100, the display will show 41100).
To display controller configuration database information, press ENTER.
Values in CFYYMMDD format are displayed if the controller was configured
with a configuration card or with a valid OEM serial port configuration update;
YYMMDD rep resents the publication date of the model configuration
database.
Cd21 ML3 - Humidity Water This code displays the status of the humidity water pump (-----, On, or OFF). If
Pump/Air Pump Status not configured, the mode is permanently deactivated and will display -----.
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (high, low or off).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan State Displays the current evaporator fan state (high, low or off).
Cd24 Controlled Atmosphere Displays the controlled atmosphere state (-----, On or Off).
State
Cd25 Compressor Run Time This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths
Remaining Until Defrost of an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor
running time.
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) reading is displayed.
Sensor Reading

T-363 4–26
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Configurable Functions
Configurable Functions - Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval (Hours There are two modes for defrost initiation, either user-selected timed intervals
or Automatic) or automatic control. The user-selected values are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours,
AUTO, or PuLS. Factory default is “AUTO”.
Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts
the interval to the next defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the
evaporator coil. Following a startup or after termination of a defrost, the time
will not begin counting down until the defrost temperature sensor (DTS)
reading falls below set point. If the reading of DTS rises above set point any
time during the timer count down, the interval is reset and the countdown
begins over.
If the DTS fails, alarm code AL60 is activated and control switches over to the
return temperature sensor. The controller will act in the same manner as with
the DTS except the return temperature sensor reading will be used.
If CnF23 is configured to SAv (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer
will be saved at power down and restored at power up. This option prevents
short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost interval, and
possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle.
NOTE
The defrost interval timer counts only during compressor run time.
Configuration variable (CnF11) determines whether the operator will be
allowed to chose OFF as a defrost interval option.
Configuration variable (CnF64) determines whether the operator will be
allowed to choose PuLS as a defrost interval option. For units operating with
PuLS selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint
and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit
temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the
defrost interval is determined using the Automatic Defrost Interval
Determination logic. In either case, PuLS remains displayed in this function
select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used
until the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN,
or the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the
new value is OFF, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to 'AUTO' unless
CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to Custom AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Logic) con figuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to
PuLS.
Cd28 Temperature Units This code determines the temperature units (C or F) which will be used for
(Degrees C or Degrees all temperature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code
F) Cd28 and pushing the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units.
This function code will display ----- if CnF34 is set to F.
Cd29 Failure Action Mode This is the desired action to be taken if an alarm occurs that severely limits the
capability of the control system. Depending upon what alarm has occurred, the
actual action taken may not be the same as the desired failure action.
The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (stepper motor SMV at maximum allowed opening)
B - Partial Cooling (stepper motor SMV 11% open)
C - Evaporator Fan Only
D - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default

4–27 T-363
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the band of temperatures around the set
point which will be designated as in-range.
For normal temperature control, control temperature is considered in range if
it is within setpoint In-Range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/ 0.5C (+/0.9F)
2 = +/ 1.0C (+/1.8F)
3 = +/ 1.5C (+/2.7F)
4 = +/ 2.0C (+/3.6F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the INRANGE light will be illuminated.
In-Range tolerance shall be set to +/ 2.0C upon activation of dehumidification
or bulb mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, IN-RANGE TOLERANCE is not
considered.
----- will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb mode is enabled or
when CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
----- will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at
Time (Seconds) startup, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all
units are powered up together. The eight possible offset values are:
0 (Factory Default), 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds
Cd32 System Current Limit The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time.
(Amperes) Limiting the unit's current reduces the load on the main power supply. This is
accomplished by reducing the SMV position until current draw is reduced to the
set point. When desirable, the limit can be lowered; however, capacity is also
reduced. The five values for 460VAC operation are 15, 17, 19, 21 (Factory
Default), 23.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or humidify.
There are configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification/
humidification capabilities are installed. In the test mode, the setpoint will be
temporarily set to 1%, allowing the test of dehumidification. After 5 minutes,
the normal setpoint is restored. If unit is configured for HUMIDIFICATION
MODE then selection of a setpoint greater than 75% will activate
humidification, and a setpoint less than or equal to 75% will activate
dehumidification. If the unit is configured for dehumidification only, then the
entire setpoint range will apply to dehumidification. If Pretrip is initiated, this
value will be set to OFF automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Cd34 Economy Mode (On-Off) The current state of the economy mode option, -----, On, or Off. CnF22
determines whether economy mode offered. Economy mode is a user
selectable mode of operation provided for power saving purposes.
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the bulb mode option, -----, nOr, or bULb.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If
dehumidification (CnF04) is set to Off, Cd35 will display Nor and the user will
be unable to change it. CnF28 determines whether the bulb mode selection is
offered.
After a dehumidification set point has been selected and entered for code
Cd33, the user may then change Cd35 to bulb. After Bulb Mode has been
selected and entered, the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37
to make the desired changes.

T-363 4–28
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd36 Evaporator Fan Speed This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb
Select Dehumidification and Humidification mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (Cd33) and bulb
mode (Cd35) has been set to bulb. If these conditions are not met, alt will be
dis played (indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and
the dis play cannot be changed.
If a dehumidification set point has been selected along with bulb mode then alt
may be selected for alternating speed, Lo for low speed evaporator fan only,
or Hi for high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than alt has been selected and bulb mode is deactivated in
any manner, then selection reverts back to alt.
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting This is the Variable Defrost Termination Thermostat (DTT) setting to be used
(Bulb Mode) with the optional bulb mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the bulb
mode option is configured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Display Only Functions - Cd38 through Cd40 are display only functions.
Cd38 Secondary Supply Code Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for
Temperature Sensor units configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER,
Cd38 will display -----. If the DataCORDER suffers a failure (AL55), Cd38 will
display the supply recorder sensor reading.
Cd39 Secondary Return Code Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for
Temperature Sensor units configured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER,
Cd39 will display -----. If the DataCORDER suffers a failure (AL55), Cd39 will
display the return recorder sensor reading.
Cd40 Container Identification If a valid container id exists, the default display for cd40 will be cd40_XXXXX
Number where XXXXX is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container
id. Pressing the Enter key on cd40 will display id_YYYYYYY where YYYYYYY
is the 5th character to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will
have cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between
_nEEd and ___id. Pressing the enter key while on cd40 in the state will prompt
the Set Id Interface.
On start up if the container id is not valid, cd40 be brought up on the display
for the first minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container
id or leaving the code select normally.
Code Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container
identification number. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the
numeric portion of the number will display.
Service Function - Cd41 is used for troubleshooting.
Cd41 Valve Override This code allows manual positioning of the SMV. Refer to paragraph 6.18 for
operating instructions.

4–29 T-363
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Configurable Functions - Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 eAutoFresh Mode Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows opening and closing
of a mechanical air vent door via a stepper motor. Selection modes are as
follows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY -The opening of the door is based on selected time, return temperature
and flow rate (percent opened).
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 selectable limits
(LM). This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open and close
to allow the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected, the controller will
zero calibrate the CO2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured with AutoFresh, the CD43 will display ----
Cd43 XtendFRESH Mode Cd43 has three selectable modes of operation:
FRESH - All XtendFRESH operations are enabled and setpoints for CO2 and
O2 can be edited.
OFF - All XtendFRESH operations are disabled.
TEST - the operator has the ability to test operation of mechanical
components, test and calibrate the CO2 sensors and verify the validity of the
O2 sensor.
Display Only Function - Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 eAutoFresh Values / Code Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2) and
CO2 Sensor Status CO2 and O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for eAutofresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a sensor
is not expected (didn't have one previously).
This function code will display ChECK if a CO2 sensor has not been auto-
detected at the most recent power-up and was detected at a previous power-
up. If ChECK is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, SEnSr is displayed
with the choices of YES and no:
“YES” sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)
Cd44 XtendFRESH Values Cd44 allows the user to view the following XtendFRESH values: CO2 setpoint,
CO2 percentage, O2 setpoint, O2 percentage, and O2 voltage.
For the CO2 setpoint, the range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments with a de-
fault setting of 5%. For the O2 setpoint, the range is from 3% to 21% in 1% in-
crements with a default setting of 10%.
Configurable Functions - Cd45 through Cd48 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
(VPS) Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5
CMH (units displayed as CM) or CFM (units displayed as CF) depending on
the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the
pressing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor
unless AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and
return to the normal display mode.

T-363 4–30
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd46 Airflow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position
Sensor or displayed by USER/FLO under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF = Cubic Feet per Minute
CM = Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth = Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial)
or the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Cd47 Variable Economy Used when Economy Mode (CnF22) is set to 3-cust. Display will show when
Temperature Setting the unit is not configured for Economy Mode.
When the unit has a perishable setpoint and Economy Mode is active, at the
start of each cooling or heating cycle, high speed evaporator fans will run for
3 minutes. After three minutes, the evaporator fans will be switched to low
speed any time that the supply temperature is within +/- 0.25C of the setpoint
and the return temperature is less than or equal to the supply temperature +
the user selected Cd47 (values are 0.5 C - 4.0C, default is 3.0 C).

4–31 T-363
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd48 Dehumidification / Bulb Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo
Cargo Mode Parameter mode, dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Selection Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Pressing
ENTER key in any parameter selection menu commits to selection of the
currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the
next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate
between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to
Cd48 display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pretrip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but will
then initialize to 95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compres-
sor Control (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for
units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C if
it had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to
25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH
evaporator speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH
evaporator speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
Whenever dehumidification control set point is set below 60% RH,
the evaporator fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set
the evaporator fan speed to Hi via the keypad.
Whenever dehumidification control set point is set equal to or above
60% RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the abil-
ity to set the evaporator fan speed to LO via the keypad.
Display Only Function - Cd49 is a display only function.
Cd49 Days Since Last Displays the number of days since last successful pretrip sequence.
Successful Pretrip Press ENTER to view the number of days since the last successful pretrip for
Auto1, Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press CODE SELECT to step back through the list and ultimately to exit the
Cd49 display.

T-363 4–32
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Configurable Functions - Cd50 through Cd53 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd50 Quest Enable/Disable "OFF" = disabled.
"On" = enabled.
"SEtPt" = suspended by setpoint too low.
"CAHUM" = suspended by CA or humidity control.
"ACt" = suspended by ACT active.
"FAIL" = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
"PrtrP" = pretrip active.
"C LIM" = suspended by cool limit logic.
"PULL" = pulldown active.
ALArM = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press enter, arrow keys, and then enter to select "OFF" or "On".
If "On" is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated by one of
the suspension codes listed above. If CCPC is not "OFF" and is not
suspended, "On" will be displayed.
Cd51 Automatic Cold ACT-mode:
Treatment (ACT) Mode Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default 0_0
Parameter Selection
done mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
ACt value On OFF or ----Display /Select: default OFF
trEAt value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default 0.0°C
DAyS value “0-99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0”
ProbE value Probe positions ex '1 2 _ 4' '1 _ 3 _' Display: default ----
SPnEW value °C / °F on 0.1 increments Display/Select: default 10.0°C
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
de fault 0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus in the order listed above. Pressing ENTER key in any of the
parameter selection menus commits to selection of the currently displayed
parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parameter
selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank
display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to
Cd51 dis play mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of Act may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if
Act is On. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint done
on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display will
be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, act-mode goes to OFF.

4–33 T-363
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd53 Automatic Setpoint ASC-mode:
Change (ASC) Mode Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default 0_0
Parameter Selection
done mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
ASC value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default OFF
nSC value “1 - 6” (This is the value n for the subsequent entries).
SP (n-1) value °C/°F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default 10.0°C
DAY (n-1) value “1-99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default 1
SP (n) value °C/°F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default 10.0°C
Initially displays current count down timer increments of (1 day)(1hr), default
“0_0”
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus in the order listed above. Pressing ENTER key in any of the
parameter selection menus selects the currently displayed parameter and
causes the interface to descend into the next parameter selection menu. All
parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display and the current
selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current
selection activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to
Cd53 dis play mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any
previously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration
options and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of ASC may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered
if ASC is On. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint
done on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right
display will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off
clears this entry. This action also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC
must then be turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to
OFF.
Display Only Functions - Cd55 through Cd58 are display only functions.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display the discharge superheat values in °C / °F as calculated by
the discharge temperature minus the discharge saturation temperature as
calculated from discharge pressure. ----- will be displayed if selection is not
valid.

T-363 4–34
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd58 Water Pressure Switch / Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if
Condenser Fan Switch these options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS
State or Override Logic switch contacts are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the
State right display will flash on all units.
NOTE:
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies
to units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function
should not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that
don’t have a WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all
units. This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed or
not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is
limited. It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have the
WPS or CFS wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this
configuration can indicate that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by
flashing the right display, however, the wiring will not allow for control of the
condenser fan
Configurable Functions - Cd60 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd60 Evaporator Fan Pulsing Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the
Temperature Setting engagement point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting is -
18.1°C. The user may change the temperature by pressing enter, then
scrolling to the desired temperature using either arrow key. Press Enter to
accept the change. The temperature setting will be retained until either a
Pretrip or Trip Start is initiated at which time the temperature will set to the
default setting.
“-----” will be displayed if CnF68 is configured OUT.
Cd62 High Speed Evaporator Dashed-out if setpoint is in frozen range OR if Cnf66 is configured OFF.
Fan Setting This function code is used to force evaporator fan speed to high while
temperature control is being performed in the perishable setpoint range. When
set to On, evaporator fans operate in high speed regardless of any other active
option that can control evaporator fan speed.
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its
state prior to the power cycle. If On, this function select code will be set to OFF
when any trip-start occurs or any pretrip test is initiated.
Default is OFF.
Cd65 TripWise If the function is off, display "OFF". If the function is on, display "ON".
“-----” will be displayed if the TripWise option is not active for the current
configuration.
Press the ENTER key. The existing entry will flash. Use the Arrow keys to
alternate between OFF and ON. Press ENTER again to set the Expiration
Interval.
Left display: “dAyS”
Right display: Expiration Interval 2 through 365 in one day increments.
Default value is 30.
Cd66 Instantaneous Power Real power in kW currently being used by the system.
(kW) Value is “-----“,“ nnn.n
Display “-----“ if not configured else nnn.n

4–35 T-363
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Code Title Description
Cd67 Total Power (kW-hr) Energy used by the system, in kW-hrs, since last Trip Start.
Value is “-----“,“ nnnnn
Display “-----“ if not configured else nnnnn
Cd70 Temp Setpoint Lock Cd70 locks out setpoint selection, requiring the user to manually turn the lock
off, prior to making a setpoint change. If the setpoint lock is “ON”, and the user
attempts to enter a new setpoint, a message “SPLK” (Setpoint Lock) is in the
left display and “ON” in the right display for five seconds.
Press the ENTER key. “SPLK” will display along with the current setting of
“ON” or “OFF”. Use the Arrow keys to change the selection - the new selection
will then flash for five seconds. Press the ENTER key to confirm the new
selection.
An event will be recorded in the DataCorder each time the action of turning it
“ON” or “OFF” is taken.
Default setting is “OFF”. Unit will default to “OFF” with the selection of PTI or
a TripWise on the unit.

T-363 4–36
 Figure 4.12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

Start
Troubleshooting

Unit does No Check Power Refer to Connect Power, Section 5.2

self test? Supply

Yes

Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to Connect Power, Section 5.2
fans start? Supply

Yes

Correct No Install Latest

software Software Refer to Controller Software, Section 4.2
version? Revision

Yes

Unit Load correct Refer to Configuration Software

configured No unit
correctly? (CnF Variables), Table 4–4
configuration

Yes

Active
See alarm Refer to Controller Alarm Indications,
Yes details &
Alarms? Table 4–6
repair

No

Pass No
Preïtrip Correct Refer to Pre-Trip Diagnostics, Section 4.7
inspection? all faults

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to Refrigeration System Service,

pressures Refrigerant Section 7.2 to Section 7.7
normal? issue

Yes

Unit OK

4–37 T-363
4.11 Controller Alarm Indications

AL05 Manual Defrost Switch Failure

Cause: Controller has detected continuous Manual Defrost Switch activity for five minutes or more.
Component Keypad
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.
If the alarm reappears after 5 minutes replace the keypad.

AL06 Keypad or Keypad Harness Fail

Cause: Controller has detected one of the keypad keys is continuously activity.
Component Keypad or Harness
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.
If the alarm reappears replace the keypad and harness.

AL07 Fresh Air Vent Open

Cause: The VPS is reading greater than 0 CMH while unit is in frozen mode or XtendFRESH active.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Manually reposition vent and confirm using Cd45. Refer to Vent Position
Sensor Service, Section 7.23.
Corrective Action If unable to obtain zero reading, replace defective VPS.

AL09 O2 Sensor Failure

Cause: Triggered anytime the O2 sensor reading is outside of the normal operation range, after an initial sig-
nal was detected.
Component O2 Sensor, O2 Amplifier, Sensor Switch Module (if equipped)
Troubleshooting Check Cd44 and scroll down to 02V. The O2 sensor output will be dis-
played in millivolts (130mV to 4100mV).
Switch equipped: If voltage is not present at Cd44 and a sensor switch
module is installed, check for O2 voltage on the black wire connected to
the sensor switch module, connecting ground of meter to TP9. If the volt-
age is in the 130mV to 4.1V range, directly wire the black wire to KD04.
This may cause an AL07 depending on O2 reading but XtendFRESH will
operate normally. If no voltage on the black wire, proceed to next step.
Check wiring (see schematic), and correct if found mis-wired.
If O2 sensor is available, remove the upper fresh air panel and evapora-
tor motor and replace the sensor. If after replacing sensor AL09 contin-
ues, replace amplifier.
If parts are not available, turn XtendFRESH option off (Cd43) and open
the Manual Fresh Air Vent.

T-363 4–38
AL10 CO2 Sensor Failure
Cause: Alarm 10 is triggered when the CO2 sensor voltage is operating outside of the normal operating
range, after an initial signal was detected.
Component This is a display alarm and has no associated failure action.
Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.
Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when voltage is within operating range.

AL11 Evaporator Fan 1 IP

Cause: Alarm 11 is triggered when configured for single evap operation and MC6 sensed high.
Component Evaporator Fan 1
Troubleshooting The unit will suspend probe check diagnostic logic and disable the probe
check portion of defrost cycle.
Corrective Action AL11 is triggered off when MC6 sensed low.

AL12 Evaporator Fan 2 IP

Cause: Alarm 12 is triggered when configured for single evap operation and KB10 sensed high.
Component Evaporator Fan 2
Troubleshooting The unit will suspend probe check diagnostic logic and disable the probe
check portion of defrost cycle.
Corrective Action AL12 is triggered off when KB10 sensed low.

AL15 Loss of Cooling

Cause: AL15 is triggered 30 minutes after the completion of a controller initiated probe check defrost if
Supply Temperature is more than 0.25°C (0.45°F) above set point. Refer to Defrost, Section 4.3.17.
Component Refrigerant Level
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Refer to Refrigerant Charge, Section 7.7. Power cycle the unit.

AL20 Control Contactor Fuse (F3)

Cause: Control power fuse (F3A or F3B) is open.
Component Check F3A, if the fuse is open:
Troubleshooting Check PA, PB, CH coils for short to ground, if short is found:
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil. Replace the fuse.
Component Check F3B, if the fuse is open:
Troubleshooting Check CF, ES, EF, HR coils for short to ground, if short is found, coil is
defective.
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil. Replace the fuse.
Component Check voltage at QC1:
Troubleshooting If voltage is present, it indicates a defective microprocessor.
Corrective Action Refer to Controller Service, Section 7.21.

4–39 T-363
 AL21 Control Circuit Fuse (F1/F2)
Cause: One of the 18 VAC controller fuses (F1/F2) is open. Refer to Cd08.
Component System Sensors
Troubleshooting Check system sensors for short to ground.
Corrective Action Replace defective sensor(s).
Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check wiring for short to ground.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Controller may have an internal short.
Corrective Action Replace controller. Refer to Controller Service, Section 7.21.

AL22 Evaporator IP
Cause: Evaporator motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Evaporator Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power, & check Evaporator Motor IP at plug
connection pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective evaporator fan motor. Refer to Evaporator Fan Motor
Service, Section 7.15.

AL23 Loss of Phase B

Cause: Controller fails to detect current draw.
Component Incoming Power
Troubleshooting Check incoming power source.
Corrective Action Correct power source as required.

AL24 Compressor IP
Cause: Compressor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit disconnect power, & check resistance of compressor
windings at contactor T1-T2, T2-T3.
Corrective Action Monitor unit. If alarm remains active or is repetitive, replace the
compressor at the next available opportunity. Refer to Section 7.8.

AL25 Condenser IP
Cause: Condenser fan motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Insufficient Air Flow
Troubleshooting Shut down unit and check condenser fan for obstructions.
Corrective Action Remove obstructions.
Component Condenser Fan Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power, & check Condenser Fan Motor IP at
plug connection pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective condenser fan motor. Refer to Section 7.11.

T-363 4–40
AL26 All Sensors Failure: Supply / Return Probes
Cause: Sensors out of range.
Component All sensors detected as out of range.
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.

AL27 Analog to Digital Accuracy Failure

Cause: Controller AD converter faulty.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates a defective
microprocessor.
Corrective Action Replace defective microprocessor. Refer to Controller Service, Section
7.21.

AL29 AutoFresh Failure (eAutoFresh)

Cause: Alarm 29 is triggered if CO2 or O2 level is outside of the limit range and the vent position is at 100%
for longer than 90 minutes.
Component Alarm LED will be activated and user intervention is required.
Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.
Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when atmospheric conditions are within limit
settings.

4–41 T-363
 AL29 Loss of Atmospheric Control (XtendFRESH)
Cause: Triggered whenever the CO2 level is above its upper limit by 1% for 60 minutes. Or, when the O2
level is greater than 1% below its setpoint for longer than 30 minutes after the unit has been in range.
The alarm is triggered off when the levels return to within the normal range.
Setup Run Cd43 test mode for troubleshooting the below components. At the
end of test mode, a sensor calibration will be attempted. Under loaded box
conditions, the sensor values may post “No Cal” or “CAL FAIL”. Results
from original calibration will be retained. If test mode times out, then hold
the code select key for 3 seconds to exit test mode.
Troubleshooting If components do not energize, check FX1 and FX2 for power (460
VAC). If fuse is open, check heater continuity (XHT1 to ground). Must be
greater than 1 mega ohm. If less than 1, disconnect the heater at XHT1
and XHT2. Replace fuse. Unit will control on fresh air solenoids.
Component Solenoid Air Vents.
Troubleshooting Visually inspect to see if the Solenoid Valves are opening air vents. If
vents open, troubleshoot the next component. If vents do not open, con-
tinue with troubleshooting below.
Check FX4 fuse for power (~20 volts dc).
If fuse is open, check wiring and or replace solenoid if part is available.
If no part is available, open manual fresh air vent.
Component XtendFRESH Fan(s) / XtendFRESH Scrubber Motor
Troubleshooting Visually inspect to see if the XtendFRESH Fan(s) are running (air blow-
ing on left, intake on right), check current draw of motor at the XST1 (~40
to 200 milliamps / contactor load side). Troubleshoot the non-operating
component. If both are running, proceed to next component.
Verify XS contactor is pulling in. If not, check FX6 fuse for power (24
VAC). If not, check power at controller KB4.
Check FX3 fuse for power (~20 vdc). If no power, replace fuse. If fuse
opens a second time, take no further action. O2 level will be controlled
with the opening and closing of the fresh air vents.
If part is available, replace either fan or scrubber motor. Fan is replace-
able from the front on a loaded unit; Scrubber motor is not. If no part is
available or accessible, take no action and service at next PTI. O2 level
will be controlled with the opening and closing of the fresh air vents.
Component Heater
Troubleshooting Verify XH contactor is pulling in. If not, check FX6 for power (24 VAC). If
open ohm contactors XHA1 and XSA1 to ground. Replace (12 Amp)
contactor. If contactor is pulling, power unit off and check heater resis-
tance from XH1 to XH2 (450 to 500 ohms). If heater is outside of the
range, disconnect heater at XHT1 and XHT2 and replace at next PTI.
Unit will control on fresh air solenoids.

AL50 Air Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

Cause: VPS Sensor out of range.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Make sure VPS is secure.
Corrective Action Manually tighten panel.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting If the alarm persists, replace the sensor or the assembly.
Corrective Action Replace VPS.

T-363 4–42
AL51 EEPROM Failure
Cause: Controller Memory Failure
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Pressing the ENTER key when CLEAr is displayed will result in an
attempt to clear the alarm.
Corrective Action If action is successful (all alarms are inactive), AL51 will be reset.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates defective controller
memory.
Corrective Action Replace defective controller. Refer to Controller Service, Section 7.21.

AL52 EEPROM Alarm List Full

Cause: Alarm list queue is full.
Component Active Alarms
Troubleshooting Repair any alarms in the queue that are active. Indicated by AA.
Corrective Action Clear alarms. Refer to Controller Alarms, Table 4–6.

AL53 Battery Pack Failure

Cause: Battery voltage low
Component Battery
Troubleshooting If this alarm occurs on start up, allow a unit fitted with rechargeable
batteries to operate for up to 24 hours to charge rechargeable batteries
sufficiently. Once fully charged, the alarm will deactivate.
Corrective Action To clear the alarm, press ENTER and ALT simultaneously at the startup
of Cd19 (Battery Check).
If alarm persists, replace the battery pack. Refer to Battery
Replacement, Section 7.21.5.

AL54 Primary Supply Sensor (STS)

Cause: Invalid Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading.
Component Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.

AL56 Primary Return Sensor (RTS)

Cause: Invalid Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading.
Component Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.

4–43 T-363
 AL57 Ambient Sensor (AMBS)
Cause: Invalid Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) reading.
Component Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
Troubleshooting Test the AMBS. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.
Corrective Action Replace AMBS if defective. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service,
Section 7.22.

AL58 Compressor High Pressure Safety (HPS)

Cause: High pressure safety switch remains open for at least one minute.
Component High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Troubleshooting Test the HPS. Refer to High Pressure Switch, Section 7.9.
Corrective Action Replace HPS if defective. Refer to High Pressure Switch, Section 7.9.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

AL59 Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT)

Cause: Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is open.
Component Alarm 59 is triggered by the opening of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT) and will result in the disabling of the heater.
Troubleshooting Check for 24 volts at test point TP10. If no voltage at TP10 after unit has
reached set point, HTT is open.
Corrective Action Replace HTT if defective.

AL60 Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)

Cause: Failure of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) to open.
Component Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)
Troubleshooting Test the DTS. Refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure, Section 7.22.2.
Corrective Action Replace the DTS if defective. Refer to Sensor Replacement, Section
7.22.4.

AL61 Heater Current Draw Fault

Cause: Improper current draw during heat or defrost mode.
Component Heater(s)
Troubleshooting While in heat or defrost mode, check for proper current draw at heater
contactors. Refer to Electrical Data, Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Replace heater(s) if defective. Refer to Evaporator Heater Removal and
Replacement, Section 7.13.
Component Contactor
Troubleshooting Check voltage at heater contactor on the heater side.
Corrective Action If no voltage present, replace heater contact or if defective.

T-363 4–44
AL62 O2 Out of Range
Cause: This is a notification alarm and does not pose a risk to fresh produce. It is triggered when there is an
indication that O2 level is rising after reaching its setpoint (+ 1%). If O2 level exceeds 4% above setpoint,
the alarm is activated. The alarm does not activate if the unit was pre-tripped or trip started between last
reaching its O2 setpoint and exceeding the plus 4%, or if power has been turned off for eight hours. The
alarm is deactivated if O2 drops below setpoint (+ 1%) or if a pre-trip or trip start is performed.
Component Scrubber Failure
Troubleshooting See the troubleshooting of the Scrubber Motor in the AL29 alarm.
Component XtendFRESH Solenoid Valves
Troubleshooting See the troubleshooting of the Solenoid Air Vent in the AL29 alarm.
Component Container Air Tightness
Troubleshooting Seal container where possible (access panels, rear doors, mounting
hardware, etc).

AL63 Current Limit

Cause: Unit operating above current limit.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for proper operation.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Power supply
Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage/frequency is within specification and balanced
according to Electrical Data, Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Correct power supply.
Component Current limit set too low
Troubleshooting Check current limit setting Code Cd32.
Corrective Action The current limit can be raised (maximum of 23 amps) using Cd32.

AL64 Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS)

Cause: Discharge Temperature sensor out of range.
Component Discharge temperature sensor (CPDS)
Troubleshooting Test the CPDS. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.
Corrective Action Replace the CPDS if defective. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service,
Section 7.22.

AL65 Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Cause: Compressor Discharge Transducer is out of range.
Component Compressor Discharge Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge Set,
Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

4–45 T-363
 AL66 (SPT) Suction Pressure Transducer, (EPT) Evaporator Pressure Transducer
Cause: Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) out of range.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate EPT and SPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold
Gauge Set, Section 7.2.
Performing a Pre-trip 5-9 test will also check the transducers.
Corrective Action Replace EPT/SPT if defective.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
Troubleshooting Monitor
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor. Refer to
Compressor Service, Section 7.8.

AL67 Humidity Sensor

Cause: Humidity Sensor (HS) reading out of range.
Component Humidity Sensor (HS)
Troubleshooting Make sure the humidity sensor is properly connected in the socket and
the wires have not been dam aged.
Corrective Action Monitor, replace HS if alarm persists.

AL68 CPC Pressure Transducer

Cause: Condenser Pressure Transducer (CPC) out of range.
Component Condenser Pressure Transducer (CPC)
Troubleshooting NA
Corrective Action Unit will disable Condenser Pressure Control if configured.

AL69 Suction Temp Sensor (CPSS)

Cause: Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) out of range.
Component Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS)
Troubleshooting Test the CPSS. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.
Corrective Action Replace CPSS if defective. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service,
Section 7.22.

AL70 Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)

Cause: Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.

T-363 4–46
AL71 Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)
Cause: Secondary Return Sensor (RRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)
Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer to
Temperature Sensor Service, Section 7.22.

AL72 Control Temp Out of Range

Cause: After the unit goes in-range for 30 minutes then out of range for a continuous 120 minutes.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Ensure unit is operating correctly.
Corrective Action Power cycle unit.
Control Temperature is in In-range.
Any Pre-trip mode, resets the timers

AL96 Scrubber Rotational Feature - optional feature

Cause: Feedback from the Scrubber Motor to the controller is not sensed when the motor is turning.
Component Scrubber Fuse
Troubleshooting Check to see if Scrubber Fuse is blown. Replace Fuse if necessary.
Component Scrubber Motor
Troubleshooting Run Test Mode and verify scrubber bed is turning. If back panel cannot
be removed to check, verify the scrubber amperage consumption, read
at XS contactor wire XSL1. If between 40 and 200mA, motor is rotating
properly. If no current detected, check and replace FX3. If current spik-
ing to 350mA for 2 seconds then dropping to 90mA, the scrubber motor
is located. If scrubber motor is locked, further inspection of the scrubber
bed is required. Unit will control CO2 with the fresh air solenoid when this
alarm occurs if scrubber inaccessible.
If Scrubber Motor not operating, follow the troubleshooting flowchart in
XtendFresh manual and take appropriate action.
Component Ground Interface Module (GIM)
Troubleshooting Once it has been verified that the scrubber motor is rotating, check the
wiring connections to the GIM module. If all wires secured properly, re-
place the GIM module if one is available. If not, the unit will control CO2
using the fresh air solenoids.

4–47 T-363
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications

NOTE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms AL70
and AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 4–10.
The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an
ERR alarm will appear on the display. This is an indication the controller needs
to be re placed.
ERROR DESCRIPTION
Indicates that the controller working memory has
ERR 0-RAM failure
failed.
ERR 1-Program Memory
Indicates a problem with the controller program.
failure
The controller program has entered a mode
ERR 2-Watchdog time-
whereby the controller program has stopped
out
executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
The controller's Analog to Digital (A-D) converter
ERR 5-A-D failure
has failed.

Internal ERR 6-IO Board failure Internal program / update failure.

ERR # Microprocessor ERR 7-Controller failure Internal version / firmware incompatible.
Failure
ERR 8-DataCORDER
Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
failure
ERR 9-Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the status
LED will indicate the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as shown below.
E R R 0 to 9
ERR0 = . .-. .-. -----
ERR1 = . .-. .-. . ----
ERR2 = . .-. .-. . . ---
ERR3 = . .-. .-. . . . --
ERR4 = . .-. .-. . . . . -
ERR5 = . .-. .-. . . . . .
ERR6 = . .-. .-. -. . . .
ERR7 = . .-. .-. --. . .
ERR8 = . .-. .-. ---. .
ERR9 = . .-. .-. ---- .
Entr Enter Set point (Press
The controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.
StPt Arrow & Enter)
Low Main Voltage
(Function Codes
This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever the
LO Cd27-38 disabled
supply voltage is less than 75% of its proper value.
and NO alarm
stored.)

T-363 4–48
4.12 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes

Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes

NOTE
Auto or Auto1 menu includes the: P, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. Auto2 menu includes P, P1,
P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts.Auto3 menu includes P, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8
and rSLts
Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Container Unit
Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD are displayed in
sequence.
Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU according to
PreTrip Initiated: whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received since the unit was booted.
Configuration Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek to its
P0-0 Display, Indicator closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to
Lamps, LEDs, and the closed position. No other Autoslide mode of operation will be available until the
Displays two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no test
codes or results associated with this phase of Pretrip. To know if the test passes
the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and the indicator lights
behave as described below.
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range.
No other system components will change state during this test.
Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the heater is
turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again. The change in
P1-0 Heaters On Test current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
Heater is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is measured. The
P1-1 Heaters Off Test change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw is in the range specified.
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within
specified range. No other system components will change state during this test.
Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and con
Condenser Fan On denser fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the current draw is measured again.
P2-0 The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
Condenser fan is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is measured.
Condenser Fan Off The change in current draw is then recorded.
P2-1
Test
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed
evaporator fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low speed
evaporator fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other system components
will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the
test will fail upon conclusion of the test.
High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will be
Low Speed turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low speed
P3-0 Evaporator Fans On evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is measured
Test again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

4–49 T-363
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
Low Speed Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw
P3-1 Evaporator Fan Off is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on, then off.
Current draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed specified ratios. No
other system components will change state during this test.

NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, the test will
fail upon conclusion of the test.
Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then high
speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is
High Speed measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
P4-0 Evaporator Fan
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND measured cur
Motors On
rent changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is skipped.
High Speed High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw
P4-1 Evaporator Fan is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Motors Off Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature Sensors.
The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes, with all
other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made between the
return and supply probes.
Supply / Return Probe Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
P5-0
Test
NOTE
If this test fails, P50 and FAIL will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this test and
the PRIMARY / SECONDARY) pass, the display will read P5 PASS.
This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary supply
probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
P5-1 Supply Probe Test
NOTE
If this test fails, P51 and FAIL will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this and the
SUPPLY/ RETURN TEST) pass, because of the multiple tests, the display will
read 'P 5' 'PASS'.
For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between primary return probe and secondary return
probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTES
P5-2 Return Probe Test
1. If this test fails, P52 and FAIL will be displayed. If both Probe tests (this
test and the SUPPLY/ RETURN) pass, because of the multiple tests, the
display will read P 5, PASS.
2. The results of PreTrip tests 50, 51 and 52 will be used to activate or clear
control probe alarms.

T-363 4–50
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature difference
between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn the heaters on for 60
seconds then measure the temperature difference between the primary sup ply
Evaporator Fan and primary return probes.
P5-3
Direction Test
After 60 seconds this test is forced to PASS irrespective of differential change in
primary supply temperature and primary return temperature.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.
P5-4 - P5-9 Not Applicable
This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
Humidity Sensor
Controller Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout is greater
P5-10 than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Configuration
Verification Test Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out and Vout
is less than 0.20 Volts. Unit must be configured with a Humidity Sensor for this test
is run.
This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
Humidity Sensor Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
P5-11 Installation
Verification Test Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Humidity Sensor Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 Volts and 4 Volts.
P5-12
Range Check Test Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.
P6 Tests - Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: This section of testing deals with the Compressor and the two
Compressor valves: Suction Modulation Valve and Quench Valve.
A current draw test is performed before the compressor is started. The
compressor is started, the SMV is opened, and another current draw test is
P6-0 Compressor On performed.
Test Passes if the change in compressor current draw is within the specified range.
P6-1,
P6-H, Not Applicable These tests are not run for Single Speed Compressors.
P6-L
The compressor and fans continue to run from the previous test. The quench valve
(if configured) will operate as in normal control mode. The SMV is closed to 0%
open, current and condenser pressure readings are taken. The SMV is opened to
Suction Modulation 50% with continuous current and condenser pressure readings taken to establish
P6-2 Valve (Open and maximum values. The SMV is returned to 0% open and final readings are taken.
Closed) Test passes if the calculated difference in current at the 50% open position are
above a specified value before and after opening of the SMV, OR the calculated
difference in condenser pressure at the 50% open position are above a specified
value before and after opening of the SMV.
To run this test, the system must be equipped with a solenoid quench valve as
determined by CnF12, (TXV/Solenoid Quench Valve), and ambient temperature
must be greater than -12C.
P6-3 Quench Valve Test
Compressor suction temperature is measured with the Quench valve closed, the
Quench valve is energized and the suction temperature drop is checked.
Test passes if suction temperature is within the valid range.
P6-4 Not Applicable This test is not run for units configured with a stepper type SMV.
This test is not run, units with stepper type SMVs are not configured with a by pass
P6-5 Not Applicable
valve.

4–51 T-363
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
This test is only run on systems that have an Unloader as indicated by CnF13
P6-6 Not Applicable
(Unloader).

NOTE
P70 & P8 are included with the Auto2 & Auto 3 only. P90 through P10 are included with Auto2 only.
P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure that the
HPS opens and closes properly.
With the unit running, the condenser fan is de-energized, and a 15 minute timer is
started. The right display shows discharge pressure if the unit is equipped with a
discharge pressure transducer (DPT). If no DPT is installed, the condenser
pressure transducer (CPT) reading will be displayed.
Test is skipped if:
Sensed ambient temperature is less than 7C (45F)
Return air temperature is less than 17.8C (0F)
The water pressure switch (WP) is open, indicating that the unit is operat-
ing with a water-cooled condenser
Test is skipped if the unit does NOT have:
A compressor discharge sensor (CPDS)
A discharge pressure transducer (DPT)
A condenser pressure transducer (CPT)
High Pressure Switch
P7-0 Test passes if the HPS opens within 15 minutes.
Closed
Test immediately fails if the following inputs are sensed to be invalid:
Compressor discharge sensor (CPDS)
Discharge pressure transducer (DPT)
Condenser pressure transducer (CPT)
Return temperature sensor (RTS)
Ambient sensor (AMBS)
Test will also fail if:
HPS fails to open within 15 minutes
Discharge temperature exceeds 138C (280F)
Discharge temperature is less than or equal to ambient temperature plus
5C (9F)
CPT or DPT pressure exceeds 27.42kg/cm2 (390psig)
Test P70 must pass for P71 to execute.
High Pressure Switch The condenser fan is started and a 60 second timer is started.
P7-1
Open Test passes if the high pressure switch (HPS) closes within the 60-second time
limit, otherwise, it fails.
P8 Tests Perishable Mode Tests: Pretrip tests P70 and P71 must have passed or have been skipped for these
tests to execute.
If the container temperature is below 15.6C (60F), the set point is changed to
15.6C, and a 60-minute timer is started. The left display will read P80. The control
will then heat the container until 15.6C is reached.
Perishable Mode
P8-0 If the container temperature is above 15.6C at the start of the test, then the test
Heat Test
proceeds immediately to test P81 and the left display will change to P81.
The test fails if the 180-minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches set point. The display will read P80, FAIL.

T-363 4–52
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
Control temperature must be at least 15.6C (60F).
The set point is changed to 0C (32F), and a 180-minute timer is started. The left
display will read P81, the right display will show the supply air temperature. The
unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the 0C set point.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches set point before the 180-
Perishable Mode Pull minute timer expires.
Down Test / On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is present,
P8-1
eAutofresh CO2 calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once P8-1 begins,
Sensor Calibration calibration will be attempted when the supply temperature goes below 5C. If the CO2
sensor voltage reads within the 0.95 <>1.15Vdc range before the end of P8-1, the
sensor will be calibrated by holding the CO2 zero line low for 4 seconds. Once
calibration is performed, the sensor voltage will be verified to make sure it is in the
0.95 to 1.05 Vdc range. If the voltage is not within this range, CO2 sensor calibration
fails.
Test P81 must pass for P82 to execute.
A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize control
temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the timer expires. The
control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the beginning of P82.
During P82, the left display will read P82, and the right display will show the supply
Perishable Mode air temperature.
P8-2 Maintain
Temperature Test When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be
compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0C, or if the
DataCorder supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control probe
temperature will be recorded as -50.0C.
P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic con
tacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the DTT function
determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or CLOSED contacts.
Primarily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the Defrost Termination Sensor
During P90 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be displayed on the
left display. The right display will show the supply air temperature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is considered
closed. Once the DTT is considered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running
the heaters for up to two hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
DTT Closed and
P9-0 Test fails if:
Open Test
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full cooling
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air temperature
rises above 248C (120F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time limit.

4–53 T-363
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
After completion of the Defrost Test, if the container temperature is below 7.2C,
the setpoint is changed to 7.2C, and a 180 minute timer is started. The control will
then be placed in the equivalent of normal heating.
If the container temperature is above 7.2C at the start of the test, then the test
Frozen Mode Setup proceeds immediately to test P101.
P10-0
Test During P10, the control temperature will be shown on the right display.
Test fails if the 180 minute timer expires before the control temperature reaches
setpoint - 0.3C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat.
There is no pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches set
point, the test proceeds to test 10-1.
When the container temperature is greater than or equal to the 7.2C (45F) set
point which was set in the frozen mode heat test, the left display will read P101
and the right display will show the return air temperature. The set point will then be
changed to 17.7C (0F). The unit will then have a maximum of three hours to pull
Frozen Mode the container temperature down to the 17.7C set point.
P10-1
Pulldown Test
If this occurs within the three hour time limit, the test passes. If pulldown is not
completed within the three hour time, the test fails.
Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pretrip sequence, P101 will auto-
repeat by starting P100 over again.
Test P101 must pass for P102 to execute.
A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize control
temperature error (return temperature minus setpoint) until the timer expires. The
control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the beginning of P102.
During P101, the left display will read P102 and the right display will show return
air temperature.
Frozen Mode
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be com
P10-2 Maintain
pared to the pass/fail criteria.
Temperature Test
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/-1.6C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/-1.6C, or if the
DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control
probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0C.
Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pretrip sequence, P102 will auto-
repeat by starting P100 over again.

T-363 4–54
 Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments

NOTE
Inapplicable Functions Display “-----”
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then CODE SELECT key
Code Title Description
Recorder Supply
dC1 Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
Temperature
Recorder Return
dC2 Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
Temperature
dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Temperatures Current readings of the three USDA probes.
Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1
dC6-13 Network Data Points 18 (Code 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from
the Controller once every minute.
Cargo Probe 4
dC14 Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
Temperature
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply,
Temperature Sensors 15
dC20-24 return, USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the
Calibration
interrogation program.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function
code dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4
contains the last four characters. (This serial number is the same as the
Controller serial number)
An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the
dC28 Minimum Days Left
Data CORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the
dC30 Date of last Trip start system goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip
start will automatically be generated on the next AC power up.
Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
dC31 Battery Test PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real-time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Calibration
the interrogation program.

4–55 T-363
 Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
Test Title Data
1-0 Heater On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open/
2-0 Condenser Fan On
Closed, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result
5-2 Secondary Return Probe Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result
6-0 Compressor On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
6-1 Not Applicable Not Used
Suction Modulation Valve Open
6-2 Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Is current or pressure limit in effect (Y,N)
and Closed
6-4 Not Applicable Not Used
6-5 Not Applicable Not Used
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed
Input values that component opens
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open
Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Heat Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16C (60F)
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0C
8-1 Perishable Pull Down
(32F)
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply
8-2 Perishable Maintain
temperature (SRS) over last recording interval.
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage,
9-0 Defrost Test
line frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Setup Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pull Down Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to 17.8C (0F).
Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain
temperature (RRS) over last recording interval.

T-363 4–56
 Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
Code Title Description
dAL70 Recorder Supply The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of 50 to 70C
Temperature Out of (58F to +158F) or, the probe check logic has determined there is a fault
Range with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 PreTrip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL71 Recorder Return The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of 50 to 70C
Temperature Out of (58F to +158F) or, the probe check logic has determined there is a fault
Range with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 PreTrip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL7274 USDA Temperatures The USDA probe temperature reading is sensed outside of 50 to 70C (58
1, 2, 3 Out of Range to 158F) range.
dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of 50 to 70C
Range (58 to 158F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dAL7885 Network Data Point The network data point is outside of its specified range. The DataCORDER
1 - 8 Out of Range is configured by default to record the supply and return recorder sensors.
The DataCORDER may be configured to record up to 8 additional network
data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is assigned to each configured
point.
When an alarm occurs, the DataCORDER must be interrogated to identify
the data point assigned.
When a humidity sensor is installed, it is usually assigned to AL78.
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately maintain
the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the unit. If this alarm
occurs, replace the RTC battery at the next available opportunity. After
replacing the battery the following actions are required:
Update the RTC setting
Update the unit's software configuration
Update the operational software
Update all user selectable function code settings (defrost, setpoint, etc)
dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORDER run time hour
and minute have not changed at the start of the hour, or the real time clock
(RTC) time has gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the hour. This situation
may be corrected by cycling the power, setting the clock or meeting the
above criteria for an hour.
dAL88 DataCORDER A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EEPROM has failed.
EEPROM Failure
dAL89 Flash Memory Error An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to the
nonvolatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full (eight alarms).

4–57 T-363
 SECTION 5
OPERATION
5.1 Inspection (Before Loading)

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

1. If container is empty, check inside for the following:

a. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.

b. Check container panels, insulation, and door seals for damage. Make permanent or temporary repairs.

c. Visually check evaporator fan motor mounting bolts for proper securement (refer to Section 7.16).

d. Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (refer to Section 7.16).

e. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fan or fan deck and clean if necessary.

f. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water (Refer to Section 7.13).

g. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.

h. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels.

2. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water (Refer to Section 7.10).
3. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.
4. Check color of moisture-liquid indicator.
5. Check oil level in compressor sight glass (if applicable).

5.2 Connect Power

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power

1. Make sure start-stop switch (ST on control panel) and circuit breaker (CB-1 in the control box) are in position
“O” (OFF).
2. Plug the 460VAC (yellow) cable into a de-energized 380/460VAC, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Place circuit breaker (CB-1) in position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.

5.2.2 Connection to 190/230VAC Power (option)

An autotransformer (Figure 5.1) is required to allow operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a 230VAC
cable and a receptacle to accept the standard 460VAC power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in color while the
460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may also be equipped with a circuit breaker (CB-2). The transformer is a
step-up transformer that will provide 380/460VAC, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz power to the unit when the 230VAC power
cable is connected to a 190/230VAC, 3-phase power source.

5–1 T-363
 1. Make sure that the start-stop switch (ST, on control panel) and circuit breakers CB-1 (in the control box and
CB-2 (on the transformer) are in position “O” (OFF). Plug in and lock the 460VAC power plug at the recepta-
cle on the transformer.
2. Plug the 230VAC (black) cable into a de-energized 190/230VAC, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Set circuit breakers CB-1 and CB2 to position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer

Circuit Breaker
(CB-2) 230 Volt

460 VAC
Power
Receptacle

Dual Voltage Modular

Autotransformer

5.3 Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air vent
(upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to the controller display.

5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0
to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
Figure 5.2 gives air exchange values for an empty container. Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded con-
tainer.

T-363 5–2
 Figure 5.2 Make Up Air Flow Chart

50HZ
250

TBAR 1 1/2”
200

TBAR 2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3”
AIR FLOW
(CMH)
100

50

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

PERCENT OPEN

60HZ
300

250 TBAR 1 1/2”

200 TBAR 2 5/8”

AIR FLOW TBAR 3”
(CMH)
150

100

50

00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN

5.3.2 Vent Position Sensor

The VPS allows the user to determine position of the fresh air vent via Cd45. This function code is accessible via
the code select key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5CMH (3CFM) or greater is detected.
It will scroll in intervals of 5CMH (3CFM). Scrolling to Cd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and
any of the following:
• Trip start
• On every power cycle
• Midnight
• Manual change greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) and remains in that position for at least four minutes

5–3 T-363
 NOTE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calculation begins on
the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position within the four minutes. On comple-
tion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain stable for the next four minutes. If vent position
changes are detected during the four minute stability period, an alarm will be generated. This provides the
user with the ability to change the vent setting without generating multiple events in the DataCORDER.

5.4 eAutoFresh Operation

The optional eAutoFresh™ venting system is controlled through two function codes, Code 43 and Code 44. Code
43 contains specific parameters for operation and Code 44 provides a visible display of component conditions.
Procedures and technical information related to the eAutoFresh™ venting system can be found in the T-342 eAut-
oFresh Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the manual from
the Literature section, click on Options > eAutoFresh.

5.5 XtendFRESH Operation

The optional XtendFRESH™ controlled atmosphere system is controlled through two function codes, Code 43 and
Code 44. Code 43 contains specific parameters for operation and Code 44 provides a visible display of component
conditions.
Procedures and technical information related to the XtendFRESH™ controlled atmosphere system can be found in
the T-366 XtendFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find
the manual from the Literature section, click on Options > XtendFRESH.

5.6 Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle

If remote monitoring is required, connect remote monitor plug at the unit receptacle, see Figure 3.5.
When the remote monitor plug is connected to the remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote circuits are
energized:

Circuit Function
Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
Sockets D to A Energizes remote in-range light

5.7 Starting and Stopping Instructions

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

5.7.1 Starting the Unit

1. With power properly applied, the fresh air vent in proper position, place the START-STOP switch to “I” (ON),
see Figure 3.5.
2. The Controller Function Codes for the container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number
(Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
3. Continue with Start Up Inspection (refer to Section 5.8).

5.7.2 Stopping the Unit

To stop the unit, place the START-STOP switch in position “O” (OFF).

5.8 Start-Up Inspection

5.8.1 Physical Inspection
1. Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.
2. Check compressor oil level (refer to Section 7.8.6).

T-363 5–4
5.8.2 Check Controller Function Codes
Check and, if required, reset controller Function Codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters (refer to Section 4.2.2).

5.8.3 Start Temperature Recorder

DataCORDER
1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parame-
ter. Refer to Section 4.8.2.
2. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do the following:
a. Depress the ALT MODE key. When the left display shows, dC, depress the ENTER key.
b. Scroll to Code dC30.
c. Depress and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
d. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the DataCORDER.

5.8.4 Complete Inspection

Allow unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions and perform a pre-trip diagnosis in accordance with Section 5.9.

5.9 Pre-Trip Diagnostics

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At the
completion of Pre-Trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.
Pre-Trip diagnostics provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and compari-
son logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
The testing begins with access to a Pre-trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of three
automatic tests.
These tests will automatically perform a series of individual Pre-trip tests. The user may also scroll down to select
any of the individual tests.
When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate
the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test short sequence will run tests P0 through
P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the Pre-trip test codes is listed in Table 4–7. If no selection is made, the Pre-trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
pre-trip testing run. If no pre-testing has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was pow-
ered up, “−−−−” will be displayed.
To start a Pre-trip test, do the following:
NOTES
Prior to starting a Pre-trip test, verify that unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance and unit amperage draw
(Cd04, Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits. Otherwise, tests may fail incorrectly.
All alarms must be rectified and cleared before starting tests.
Pre-trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the keypad initiation
described below except that should a test fail, the Pre-trip mode will automatically terminate. When initi-
ated via communications, a Pre-trip test may not be interrupted with an arrow key, but the Pre-trip test
can be terminated with the PRE-TRIP key.

5–5 T-363
 1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to accesses the Pre-trip test selection menu.
2. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display AUTO, AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired and then press the ENTER key.
The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left display, where the #’s indicate the test number and
sub-test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of
time remaining in the test.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing the unit will suspend operation awaiting opera-
tor intervention.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be
shown on the right display, with the corresponding test number to the left.
The user may then press the DOWN ARROW to repeat the test, the UP ARROW to skip to the next test or the
PRE-TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait indefinitely until the user manually enters a command.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!
When an Auto test runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit the Pre-trip mode and return to
normal control operation.
If configuration variable CnF42 is set to IN, a DataCORDER trip start will be entered. If CnF42 is set to
OUT, the trip start will not be entered. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated
manually if required.
3. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display an individual test code. Pressing ENTER when the desired test code is displayed.
Individually selected tests, other than the LED/ Display test, will perform the operations necessary to
verify the operation of the component. At the conclusion, PASS or FAIL will be displayed.
This message will remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select
another test. If the three minute time period expires, the unit will terminate pre-trip and return to control
mode operation.
While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and
holding the PRE-TRIP key.
The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a test but remain at the test
selection menu, the user may press the UP ARROW key. When this is done all test outputs will be de-
energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
During Pre-trip testing, current limiting and pressure limiting are both active, except during P-7 (High
Pressure Switch Testing) when pressure limiting is turned off.
4. At the end of the pre-trip test selection menu, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pre-trip results) will be displayed.
Pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to see the results for all subtests (i.e., 1-0, 1-1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a
test has not been run since power up, “−−−−−” will be displayed.
Once all pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
required.

T-363 5–6
5.10 Probe Diagnostics
A complete temperature probe check is performed during the P5 Pre-trip test. A probe check is also run at the end
of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal operation. During normal operation, the controller continu-
ously monitors and compares adjacent temperature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to compare the
readings from the adjacent temperature probes. If a significant difference in temperature readings is detected
between probes, a defrost cycle, followed by another probe check may be initiated. Any continued disagreement
between probes will prompt the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe, and the backup probe will be
used for temperature control.
In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe disagreement
is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/ or a difference of 2.0°C (3.6°F)
between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can trigger a defrost probe check.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trigger a
defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Normally,
the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the supply probes are used for
control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non-controlling probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe check.
If, after the defrost probe check, the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors
are considered valid and the unit returns to normal control.
In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
If the supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply probe. If
the probe check is run as part of Pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time
defrost probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best
supply probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also
invalidated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of Pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost probe
check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe is greater
than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also invalidated. If the
unit is in perishable mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.

5.11 Emergency Bypass Operation (option)

Operation by the refrigeration controller may be overridden by use of the EMERGENCY BYPASS switch. The
EMERGENCY BYPASS switch functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure.
To place the unit in the emergency bypass mode, cut the wire tie installed at the switch mounting and place the
EMERGENCY BYPASS switch in the BYPASS position. This will in turn activate the Emergency Bypass System
(EBS) control module.
To operate the fans only, the MODE switch must be in the FANS ONLY position and the EMERGENCY BYPASS
Switch must be in the ON position.
The EBS module uses the system safety devices (high pressure switch, motor internal protectors, and heat termi-
nation thermostat) to protect the system while in Emergency Bypass Mode.

! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the emergency bypass switch is in the
BYPASS position and the MODE SWITCH is in the FULL COOL position.

If the cargo is at risk of being damaged by low temperatures, the operator must monitor con-
tainer temperature and manually cycle operation as required to maintain temperature within
required limits.

5–7 T-363
In the ON position the EBS will be enabled. With the MODE SWITCH in the FULL COOL MODE. The following will
occur simultaneously:

1. The EBS switch will enable EBS input.

2. The phase detection circuit will detect the phase rotation and close to provide power to the compressor con-
tactor.
3. The condenser fan contact will close to energize the condenser contactor and provide power to the con-
denser fan motor.
4. The evaporator fan contact will close to energize the high speed evaporator contactor and provide power to
the evaporator fan motor.
5. The EBS electronic module will open the SMV to 100%.

To return the unit to normal operation, place the EBS switch in the NORMAL OPERATION position. When emer-
gency operation is no longer required, re-install the wire tie at the switch mounting.

5.12 TripWise (Option)

TripWiseTM is a new premium option available for PrimeLINE and PrimeLINE with Edge units. TripWise is software
logic that runs during every voyage as often as possible to indicate whether a standard Pre-trip Inspection (PTI) is
needed and skip unless necessary. The tests run in the background and are similar to those completed as part of
the standard PTI selection, which includes the following:
• Alarm Presence • Defrost Temperature Sensor
• Evaporator Motor Current • Electronic Expansion Valve
• Heater Current • RMU Presence
• Condenser Motor Current • Compressor Test
• Compressor Current • Digital Loader / Unloader Valves
• Humidity Sensor • Economizer Valve
• Supply / Return Sensors • Temperature Control
• Evaporator Temperature and Pressure Sensors • Suction / Discharge Temperature and Pressure

5.12.1 Checking TripWise Status

To check the status of the container, press the PRE-TRIP key on the keypad. The message “SELCt | PrtrP” will
appear on the display module, alternating with one of the following TripWise status messages:
• trIPW | OFF. The TripWise option is turned off.
• trIPW | EX (Expired). It is recommended to pre-trip the unit prior to the unit's next trip following customer-
specific guidelines.
• trIPW | PASS. The container should be ready for use after the operator has conducted a visual inspection.
Standard PTI is not required.
• trIPW | CHECK. If any TripWise test(s) execute and do not meet the pass / fail requirements, It is recom-
mended to pre-trip the unit following customer-specific guidelines prior to the unit's next trip.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

Pressing the ENTER key while “SELCt | PrtrP” is displayed will enter into the Pre-trip test menu. Pressing the
Arrow keys will navigate through the standard PTI test selections menu.

5.12.2 Enabling or Disabling TripWise Option

1. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
 2. Use the Arrow keys to bring up code Cd65 in the display.
3. Press the ENTER key. The display will show either “-----”, “OFF” or “ON”.

NOTE
If “-----” is displayed, the TripWise function option is not active on the unit. To add this option to the unit,
the equipment owner would need to contact their Regional Carrier Sales Manager.

4. Use the Arrow keys to toggle between “ON” and “OFF” and then press the ENTER key to select the desired
option.
5. If “ON” is selected, the display will show “dAYS”. This is the expiration time (2 through 365 in 1 day incre-
ments). Use the Arrow keys to change the parameter and then press the ENTER key to confirm.

NOTE
The expiration interval is the total maximum days allowed between the running of each test. For exam-
ple, if days are set to 30 and the low speed evaporator fan test has not run within those 30 days, the
TripWise expired message will be displayed. If the TripWise expired message is displayed, it is recom-
mended to Pre-trip the unit following customer specific guidelines prior to the next trip.

5.12.3 TripWise Status Event

A TripWise status event will be recorded in the DataCorder recorder when the PTI is selected. In the current
DataLINE software release, the event will show the status of the unit.

Figure 5.3 TripWise Status in DataCorder

In DataLINE version 3.2, perform an all data download by selecting from the drop down menu “TripWise Summary”
and then select a date in “User Logged Events” as shown in the Figure below.

Figure 5.4 Generating TripWise Summary Report

This will generate the status / results in a DataLINE TripWise Summary Report as shown in the Figure below.

5–9 T-363
Figure 5.5 TripWise Summary Report

Status
Results
5.13 Automatic Cold Treatment (Option)
Cold Treatment has been employed as an effective post-harvest method for the control of Mediterranean and cer-
tain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (3.6°F) or below for specific time peri-
ods results in the mortality of various life stages for this group of insects.
Automated Cold Treatment (ACT) in the Carrier Transicold unit is a method to simplify the task of completing cold
treatment by automating the process of changing the setpoints. ACT is set up through Code Selection Cd51. Refer
to Function Code table in this manual for Cd51 menu processing and displays.

Procedure to Set ACT:

1. Enter the required cargo setpoint. It must be lower than the treatment temperature that will be discussed in
step 4.
2. Press CODE SELECT, use the arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and press ENTER.
3. "ACt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display "Off". Use the arrow key to scroll to "On" in
the right display and press ENTER.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

4. “trEAt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing the last setting (shown as XX.X°C).
"trEAt" is the maximum value that the USDA probes need to remain below, to pass the Cold Treatment pro-
tocol. For instance, if the treat value is set at 35.0°F (1.7°C) then the USDA probe temperatures must
remain below 35.0°F (1.7°C) to pass.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

5. "dAyS" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the arrow key to select the
desired days for cold treatment and press ENTER.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

6. "ProbE" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display the probe numbers that are connected.
Press ENTER. For instance, if "1234" is displayed, then all four of the probes are connected.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

7. "SPnEW" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the arrow key to select the
desired setpoint after the cold treatment process has successfully completed and press ENTER. This would
be the final temperature prior to the delivery of the cargo.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

8. Cd51 is now displayed in the left display and the right will display days / hours.

5–11 T-363
 COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

Once the cold treatment process has been initiated, setpoint change via the keypad is disabled.
The unit will start to countdown once all detected USDA probes have reached the cold treatment temperature in
step 4 above. The cold treatment process will continue until the number of days specified in step 5 is reached.
During operation, Cd51 will show the number of days and hours remaining in the cold treatment.
While the unit is operating in ACT mode, the left hand display will alternate between "COLd" and setpoint. The right
hand display will alternate between "trEAt" and the cargo temperature. Once the treatment time has been com-
pleted, the setpoint temperature will increase to the "SPnEW" setting chosen in step 7.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

When the cold treatment process is complete, the "SPnEW" setpoint will be displayed in the left hand display and
cargo temperature in the right hand display, alternating with "COLd" "Done". "COLd" "Done" will continue to alter-
nate with the setpoint and cargo temperature until ACT is turned off.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

ACT can be manually turned off by selecting Cd51, scrolling to "Off" and pressing ENTER.
ACT will be automatically turned off with a TripStart, or if a Pretrip is initiated. Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC/
Cd53) and ACT (Cd51) will not work simultaneously. Setting one will deactivate the other.
Procedure to Turn ACT OFF:
ACT will be automatically turned off with a TripStart, or if a Pretrip is initiated.
1. To manually turn ACT Off, press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to bring up "Off" in the right display and press the ENTER key

T-363 5–12
5.14 Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Cd53
Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) allows up to 6 setpoint changes to be pre-programmed over defined periods of
time using Cd53.
1. Press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd53, then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to ON, then press the ENTER key. If ASC is already ON, selecting OFF will ter-
minate ASC.
4. Select the desired number of setpoint changes (nSC) by scrolling through the available “flashing” options (1
– 6) in the right display, then press the ENTER key.
5. Select the initial setpoint: With (SP 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” setpoint
in the right display and press ENTER.
6. Select the days desired for initial setpoint (SP 0): With (DAY 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the
desired “flashing” days (1 to 99) in the right display and press ENTER.
7. Select the next setpoint (SP 1): With (SP 1) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.
8. Continue to select each additional setpoint.
9. Select a final setpoint (SP x): With (SP x) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.
While the unit is operating in ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint and
“ASC”. The right hand display will alternate between current control temperature and “ACtvE”. The user can deter-
mine the amount of time left at the current setpoint by selecting Cd53. The amount of time left will be displayed in
the right display (XX (days) / XX (hours). By sequentially pressing ENTER, set parameters can be viewed.
At completion of ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint “ASC”. The right hand
display will alternate between current control temperature and “Done”.
The display will remain this way until ASC is turned off. The user can determine the date of completion by selecting
Cd53. With (done) in the left display, the date of completion will be displayed in the right display (Month / Day).
ASC can be manually turned off by selecting Cd53, scrolling to “Off” and pressing the ENTER key.
ACS will be automatically turned off after three days without power, or if a Pre-trip is initiated.
ACS (Cd53) will work independently of Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) (Cd51). Setting one deactivates the other

5–13 T-363
 SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 Unit Will Not Start or Starts Then Stops

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
External power source OFF Turn on
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected 5.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuses (F3A, F3B) blown Check
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 7.15
Condenser fan motor internal protector open 7.11
Component(s) Not Operating Compressor internal protector open 7.8
High pressure switch open 6.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, but does not Single phasing Check
start Shorted or grounded motor windings 7.8
Compressor seized 7.8

6.2 Unit Operates Long or Continuously Long in Cooling

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Hot load (Failure to Pre-cool) Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant 7.7.1
Evaporator coil covered with ice 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris 7.13
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 7.13/7.15
Defective evaporator fan motor 7.15
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Refrigeration System Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par Open valves
tially closed completely
Dirty condenser 7.10.1
Compressor worn 7.8
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value 4.4.3
Suction modulation valve malfunction 7.18

6–1 T-363
6.3 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Compressor Compressor valves defective 7.8
Abnormal pressures 6.7
Controller malfunction 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective 7.15
Refrigeration System
Suction modulation valve malfunction 7.18
Condenser Pressure Transducer defective Check
Shortage of refrigerant 7.7.1

6.4 Unit Will Not Heat or Has Insufficient Heating

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open 7.15
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination switch open 7.13
Heater(s) defective 7.13
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating backwards 7.13/7.15
Unit will not heat or has Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
insufficient heat Controller malfunction 6.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage 3.3

6.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction 6.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with
7.13
the heat relay

T-363 6–2
6.6 Unit Will Not Defrost Properly
Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 4–5
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termination
Replace
thermostat open
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Manual defrost switch defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost manually
Defrost temperature sensor open 7.22
Initiates but relay (DR) drops out Low line voltage 3.3
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal

6.7 Abnormal Pressures (Cooling)

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Condenser coil dirty 7.10.1
Condenser fan rotating backwards 7.11
Condenser fan inoperative 7.11
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 7.7.1
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Suction modulation valve malfunction 7.18
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter-drier partially plugged 7.12
Low refrigerant charge 7.7.1
Expansion valve defective 7.17
Low suction pressure
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 7.13
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 7.15.3
Suction modulation valve malfunction 7.18
Heat exchanger defective Replace
Suction and discharge pressures
tend to equalize when unit is Compressor valves defective 7.8
operating Compressor cycling/stopped Check

6–3 T-363
6.8 Abnormal Noise or Vibrations
Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Loose mounting bolts Tighten
Worn bearings 7.8
Compressor Worn or broken valves 7.8
Liquid slugging 7.17
Insufficient oil 7.8.6
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator Fan Worn motor bearings 7.11/7.15
Bent motor shaft 7.11/7.15

6.9 Microprocessor Malfunction

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Defective Sensor 7.22
Defective wiring Check
Will not control
Fuse (F1, F2) blown Replace
Stepper motor suction modulation valve circuit malfunction 7.18

6.10 No Evaporator Air Flow or Restricted Air Flow

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Frost on coil 6.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 7.13
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open 7.15
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective 7.15
No or partial evaporator air flow
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective 7.15
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace

6.11 EAutoFresh Not Operating

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd43 in Off mode 4.10
Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective 7.24
Stepper motor defective 7.24
Unit operating in frozen mode 5.4
Check CO2 sensor 5.4
Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Unit operating in frozen mode 5.4

T-363 6–4
6.11 EAutoFresh Not Operating
Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Enter Key not held for sufficient length of time 5.4
Unable to calibrate CO2 sensor CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check
Check CO2 sensor 5.4
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd44 displays -----
Check CO2 sensor 5.4

6.12 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Malfunction

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Low refrigerant charge 7.7.1
External equalizer line plugged Open
Wax, oil or dirt plugging valve or orifice ice formation at
7.17
valve seat
Low suction pressure with high Superheat too high 7.7.1
superheat
Power assembly failure 7.17
Loss of element/bulb charge 7.17
Broken capillary 7.17
Foreign material in valve 7.17
Superheat setting too low 7.17
High suction pressure with low
External equalizer line plugged ice holding valve open Open
superheat
Foreign material in valve 7.17
Pin and seat of expansion valve eroded or held open by
Liquid slugging in compressor 7.17
foreign material
Improper bulb location or installation 7.17
Fluctuating suction pressure
Low superheat setting 7.17

6.13 Autotransformer Malfunction

Condition Possible Cause Remedy /
Reference
Unit will not start Circuit breaker (CB1 or CB2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective 7.20
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle 5.2.2

6–5 T-363
 SECTION 7
SERVICE
NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you
must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608.

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. NEVER use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

NOTE
Annual maintenance procedures for ThinLINE units 69NT40-541 can be found in the 62-10327 Annual
Maintenance Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration web site. To find
the manual from the Literature section, click on Container Units > All Container Units > Operation.

7.1 Section Layout

Service procedures are provided in this section beginning with refrigeration system service, then refrigeration system
component service, electrical system service, temperature recorder service and general service. Refer to the Table of
Contents to locate specific topics.

7.2 Manifold Gauge Set

The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system.

Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set

1
2

3 7

4 6
5

1. Discharge Pressure Gauge 5. Utility Connection to: refrigerant cylinder, vacuum

2. Suction Pressure Gauge pump, oil container
3. Discharge Pressure Valve (shown backseated) 6. Low Side Connection
4. High Side Connection 7. Suction Pressure Valve (shown frontseated)
-----

7–1 T-363
When the Suction Pressure Valve is frontseated (turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be checked
at the Suction Pressure Gauge.
When the Discharge Pressure Valve is frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the Discharge
Pressure Gauge.
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
When the Suction Pressure Valve is open and the Discharge Pressure Valve is shut, the system can be charged
through the Utility Connection. Oil can also be added to the system.
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the models
covered within this manual. The manifold gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold. (Carrier Transicold
P/N 07-00294-00, which includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2).
If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
contaminants and air as follows:
1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat both hand
valves.
2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and refrigerant 134a cylinder.
3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge with R-134a to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1kg/cm2
(1.0 psig).
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready for use.

Figure 7.2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set

1. RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose (SAE

J2196/R-134a)

2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme)

3. YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose

(SAE J2196/R-134a)
To Low Side To High Side
Access Valve Access Valve
2 1 4. Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5)
6
5. High Side Field Service Coupling (Red Knob)

3 6. BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose (SAE

4 4 J2196/R-134a)

7 2 5 7. Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue Knob)

-----
7.3 Service Valves
Compressor suction, compressor discharge, and liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are provided with a
double seat and a gauge connection, which enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines.
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat the valve to close off the suction, discharge or
liquid line and open the gauge port to the compressor or low side. Turning the stem counterclockwise (all the way
out) will backseat the valve to open the connections and close off the port.
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and backseat, both of the service valve connections are open to the
access valve path.
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated when connecting a manifold gauge to measure pressure.
Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2-turn to measure the pressure.

T-363 7–2
 Figure 7.3 Service Valve

1. Line Connection
2
1 3 2. Access Valve

3. Stem Cap

4. Valve Stem

5. Compressor Filter Drier Inlet Connection

4
6. Valve (Frontseated)
6 7 7. Valve (Backseated)
5

-----

Connection of the manifold gauge/hose set (see Figure 7.4) is dependent on the component being serviced. If only
the compressor is being serviced, the high side coupling is connected to the discharge service valve.
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high side coupling is connected to the liquid line service valve.
The center hose connection is brought to the tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).
Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set:
1. Remove service valve stem cap and make sure the valve is backseated.
2. Remove service port cap (See Figure 7.3).
3. Connect the high side field service coupling (see Figure 7.2) to the discharge or liquid line valve service
valve port.
4. Turn the high side field service coupling knob (red) clockwise, which will open the high side of the system to
the gauge set.
5. Connect the low side field service coupling to the suction service valve port.
6. Turn the low side field service coupling knob (blue) clockwise, which will open the low side of the system to
the gauge set.
7. To read system pressures, slightly midseat the high side and suction service valves.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.

Removing the Manifold Gauge Set:

1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high side service valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
drawn down to suction pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
3. Backseat the suction service valve. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold set
valves. Remove the couplings from the service ports.
4. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).

7.4 Pump the Unit Down

To service the filter-drier, moisture-liquid indicator, expansion valve, suction modulation valve, quench valve, or
evaporator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side as follows:
1. Attach manifold gauge set to compressor service valves (refer to Section 7.2).
2. Start the unit and run in a cooling mode for 10 to 15 minutes. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. Place
start-stop switch in the OFF position when the suction reaches a positive pressure of 0.1kg/cm2 (1.0psig).

7–3 T-363
 3. Frontseat the suction service valve. The refrigerant will be trapped between the compressor suction service
valve and the liquid line valve.
4. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
gauge. If a vacuum is indicated, emit refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a
slight positive pressure.
5. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient tempera-
ture before dismantling. This avoids internal condensation, which puts moisture in the system.
6. After repairs have been made, be sure to perform a refrigerant leak check (refer to Section 7.5), and evac-
uate and dehydrate the low side (refer to Section 7.6).
7. Check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 7.7).

7.5 Refrigerant Leak Checking

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

1. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector. Testing
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks.
2. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between 2.1
to 3.5kg/cm2 (30 to 50psig). Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-check all connections.

NOTE
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to pressurize the system. Any other gas or vapor will contami-
nate the system, which will require additional purging and evacuation of the system.
3. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system and repair any leaks.
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit (refer to Section 7.6).
5. Charge unit per Section 7.7.

7.6 Evacuation and Dehydration

7.6.1 General
Moisture is the deadly enemy of refrigeration systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have
many undesirable effects. The most common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering
devices by free water, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.

7.6.2 Preparation
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test (refer to Section 7.5).
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system include a vacuum pump (8m-/hr = 5cfm vol-
ume displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
07-00176-11. The micron gauge is P/N 07-00414-00.
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the
ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
4. Additional time may be saved during a complete system pump down by replacing the filter-drier with a sec-
tion of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be performed during the
charging procedure.

T-363 7–4
 Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections

1. Discharge Service Valve

2 3
2. Compressor
1 4 3. Suction Service Valve

4. Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser

5. Manifold Gauge Set

6. Reclaimer
8 7. Refrigerant Cylinder
5 S D
6 9 8. Liquid Service Valve
10
9. Low Side Hose
11
10. Center Hose

11. High Side Hose

1
12. Vacuum Pump
13
7
13. Electronic Vacuum Gauge

-----

7.6.3 Complete System

1. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
2. The recommended method to evacuate and dehydrate the system is to connect three evacuation hoses
(see Figure 7.4) to the vacuum pump and refrigeration unit. Be sure the service hoses are suited for evacu-
ation purposes.
3. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum with
the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. Repair
leaks if necessary.
4. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
5. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the vacuum
pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the electronic vac-
uum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vac-
uum holds.
6. Break the vacuum with clean dry refrigerant 134a gas. Raise system pressure to approximately 0.2kg/cm2
(2psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
7. Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 one time.
9. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter-drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
10. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
tainer on weight scales. Continue to Section 7.7.

7.6.4 Procedure - Partial System

1. If the refrigerant charge has been removed from the compressor for service, evacuate only the compressor
by connecting the evacuation set-up at the compressor service valves. Follow evacuation procedures of the
preceding paragraph except leave compressor service valves frontseated until evacuation is completed.

7–5 T-363
 2. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the
evacuation set-up at the compressor service valves and liquid service valve except leave the service valves
frontseated until evacuation is completed.
3. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to
isolate the service connections and then continue with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in accor-
dance with normal procedures.

7.7 Refrigerant Charge

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. NEVER use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge

NOTE
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing
refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you must comply with all local government environmental
laws. In the U.S., refer to EPA section 608.

1. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor discharge and suction service valves.
2. Bring the container temperature to approximately 1.7°C (35°F) or -17.8°C (0°F). Set the controller set point
to -25°C (-13°F) to ensure that the suction modulation valve is at maximum allowed open position.
3. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. If covering the lower portion of the coil is not sufficient, remove the
left hand infill panel and cover the left side of the coil. Increase the area blocked until the compressor dis-
charge pressure is raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
4. On the receiver, the level should be between the glasses. If the refrigerant level is not correct, continue with
the following paragraphs to add or remove refrigerant as required.

7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge)

1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum (refer to Section 7.6).
2. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge
charging line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
3. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve half-way and allow the liquid refrigerant to flow into the
unit until the correct weight of refrigerant (refer to Section 3.2) has been added as indicated by scales.

NOTE
It may be necessary to finish charging unit through suction service valve in gas form, due to pressure
rise in high side of the system (refer to Section 7.7.3).

4. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off gauge port). Close liquid valve on cylinder.
5. Start unit in cooling mode. Run approximately 10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge.

7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge)

1. Examine the unit refrigerant system for any evidence of leaks. Repair as necessary (refer to Section 7.5).
2. Maintain the conditions outlined in Section 7.7.1.
3. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove the service port cap.
4. Connect charging line between suction service valve port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR
valve.
5. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
appears at the proper level.

T-363 7–6
7.8 Compressor

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the com-
pressor.
NOTES
• The compressor should not operate in a vacuum greater than 500mm/hg (20 inches/hg).
• The service replacement compressor is sold without shutoff valves (but with valve pads), and without termi-
nal box and cover. Customer should retain the original terminal box, cover, and high pressure switch for use
on replacement compressor.
• Check oil level in service replacement compressor (refer to Section 7.8.6).
• A compressor terminal wiring kit must be ordered as a separate item when ordering replacement compres-
sor. Appropriate installation instructions are included with kit.
• Refer to Table 7–5 and Table 7–6 for applicable compressor wear limits and torque values.
• Refer to Figure 7.41 for charts on compressor pressure, temperature and motor current curves.

7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

1. Remove the protective guard from lower section of the unit.
2. Pump down low side (refer to Section 7.4) or frontseat compressor service valves and remove refrigerant
from compressor using a refrigerant recovery system.
3. Locate the compressor junction box. Tag and disconnect wiring from compressor terminals and remove
compressor junction box.
4. Loosen service valve mounting bolts, break seal, and then remove bolts.
5. Remove compressor plate mounting bolts.
6. Remove compressor and mounting plate. Refer to Section 3.2 for weight of compressor.

Figure 7.5 Compressor

1. Discharge Valve Flange

1 2 2. High Side Pressure Connection
15 3 3. Low Side Pressure Connection
4. Suction Valve Flange
14 5. Motor End Cover
4 6. Serial / Model Number Plate
13 7. Bottom Plate
8. Sight Glass
12 9. Oil Drain Plug
10. Oil Charging Valve
11
5 11. Bearing Head
10 12. Oil Pump
6 13. Oil Fill Plug
9
14. Cylinder Head
8 7 15. Valve Plate
-----
1. Remove high pressure switch (HPS) from compressor and check operation of switch (refer to Section 7.9.1).
2. Remove compressor mounting bolts from mounting plate and install mounting plate on replacement compressor.
3. Install replacement compressor terminal wiring kit, following instructions included with kit.
4. Install high pressure switch on compressor.
5. Install compressor and mounting plate in unit.

7–7 T-363
 6. Connect junction box(es) to compressor and connect all wiring per wiring diagram. Install junction box
cover(s).
7. Install new gaskets on service valves.
8. Install mounting bolts in service valves and torque to 2.77 to 4.15mkg (20-30ft/lb).
9. Attach two hoses (with hand valves near vacuum pump) to the suction and discharge service valves. Dehy-
drate and evacuate compressor to 500 microns (75.9 cm Hg vacuum = 29.90 inches Hg vacuum). Turn off
valves on both hoses to pump.
10. Fully backseat (open) both suction and discharge service valves.
11. Remove vacuum pump lines.
12. Start unit and check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 7.7).
13. Check moisture-liquid indicator for wetness. Change filter-drier if necessary (refer to Section 7.12).
14. Check compressor oil level per Section 7.8.6. Add oil if necessary.

7.8.2 Compressor Disassembly

! WARNING
Before disassembly of any external compressor component make sure to relieve possible
internal pressure by loosening the bolts and tapping the component with a soft hammer to
break the seal.

! WARNING
Removing the compressor motor press-fit stator in the field is not recommended. The rotor
and stator are a matched pair and should not be separated.

When disassembling compressor, matchmark parts so they may be replaced in their same relative positions (see
Figure 7.5). Refer to Table 7–5 and Table 7–6 for compressor wear limits and bolt torque values.
1. Place the compressor in a position where it will be convenient to drain the oil. Remove the oil fill plug (see
Figure 7.5) to vent the crankcase. Loosen the drain plug in bottom plate and allow the oil to drain out slowly.
Remove the plug slowly to relieve any crankcase pressure. Some units have a plug in the bottom center of
the crankcase, which may be removed for draining the motor end more quickly.

Figure 7.6 Exploded View of Valve Plate

1. Discharge Valve Screw and Lockwasher

4 5
1 2 3
2. Discharge Valve Stop

3. Discharge Valve

4. Valve Plate

Jack Here 5. Valve Plate Gasket

6. Cylinder Head Gasket

7
7. Valve Plate Assembly
6

-----

T-363 7–8
 Figure 7.7 Bottom Plate Removed

1. Oil Pressure Relief Valve

2 2. Oil Return Check Valve

3
3. Oil Suction Tube
1
4. Cap Screw
5
5. Connecting Rod and Cap Assembly

-----
2. Loosen cylinder head cap screws. If the cylinder head is stuck, tap the center of the cylinder head with a
wooden or lead mallet. Do not strike the side of the cylinder head. Be careful not to drop the head or dam-
age the gasket sealing surface. Remove cylinder head bolts and gasket (see Figure 7.6).
3. Remove valve stops and valves. After they have been removed, free the valve plate from the cylinder deck
by using the outside discharge valve hold-down cap screw as a jack screw through the tapped hole of the
valve plate. Remove the valve plate gasket.
4. Turn the compressor on its side and remove the bottom plate oil suction screen and screen hold down plate.
Inspect the screen for holes or an accumulation of dirt. The screen can be cleaned with a suitable solvent.
5. Match mark each connecting rod cap (see Figure 7.7) and connecting rod for correct reassembly. Remove
the bolts and connecting rod caps. Push the piston rods up as far as they will go without having the piston
rings extend above the cylinders.

! CAUTION
The copper tube that connects to the oil suction strainer extends out the bottom with the bot-
tom plate removed. Take precautions to avoid bending or breaking it while changing crankcase
positions.

6. If necessary, remove the oil return check valve (see Figure 7.7). Inspect it for proper operation (flow in one
direction only). Replace the assembly with a new unit if check valve operation is impaired.
7. To remove the oil pump (see Figure 7.8) remove eight cap screws, oil pump bearing head assembly, gasket,
and thrust washer.

Figure 7.8 Oil Pump and Bearing Head

1. Oil Pump & Bearing Head

Set screw must be removed
1 2. Thrust Washer

3. Oil Pickup Tube

4. Oil Inlet Port

5. Oil Pump Inlet

2 3
5
4

-----

7–9 T-363
 NOTE
If the oil pump was not operating properly, the entire oil pump & bearing head assembly must be
replaced. Individual parts are not available. If the pump requires inspection or cleaning, disassemble
and reassemble by referring to Figure 7.9. Clean all parts and coat all moving parts with compressor
oil before proceeding with reassembly.

Figure 7.9 Low Profile Oil Pump

12 1. Cap screws
2. Cover
3. Reversing Assembly
7
6 4. Pinion
5 5. Gear
4
3 11 6. Drive
2 7. O-Ring
1
8. Oil Pump & Bearing
10 9. Set Screw
8 9 10. Relief Valve
11. Pin
12. Gasket

-----
8. Be very careful not to damage the motor windings when removing the motor end cover (see Figure 7.10),
as the cover fits over the winding coils. Loosen the cap screws, break the seal, and then remove all cap
screws except one in the top of the cover. While holding the cover in place, remove the remaining cap
screw. Do not allow the cover to drop from its own weight. To prevent striking the winding, remove the cover
horizontally and in line with the motor axis.

Figure 7.10 Motor End Cover

1. Strainer Screws and Washers

7
4 6
5 2. Suction Strainer

3 3. Motor End Cover Gasket

2 4. Motor End Cover

5. Valve Gasket
1
6. Suction Service Valve

7. Valve Cap Screw

-----
9. Remove the refrigerant suction strainer. If it is removed with ease, it may be cleaned with solvent and
replaced. If the strainer is broken, corroded or clogged with dirt that is not easily removed, replace the
strainer. Install new gaskets upon reassembly.
10. Block the compressor crankshaft so that it cannot turn. Use a screwdriver to bend back the tabs on the lock-
washer, and remove the equalizer tube and lock screw assembly (see Figure 7.11). The slingers at the end
of the tube draw vapor from the crankcase. Remove the rotor using a jack bolt. Insert a brass plug into the
rotor hole to prevent damage to the end of the crankshaft.

T-363 7–10
 11. If the piston rings extend beyond the cylinder tops, the pistons can be pulled through the bottom plate open-
ing after the piston rings are compressed. A piston ring compressor will facilitate removal. Each piston pin is
locked in place by lock rings, which are snapped into grooves in the piston wall (see Figure 7.12).
12. Since the stator cannot be replaced in the field, the terminal plate assembly need not be disturbed unless a
leak exists and the plate assembly needs to be replaced. If no terminal plate repair is required, proceed with
reassembly.

Figure 7.11 Equalizing Tube and Lock Screw Assembly

1. Equalizer Tube and Lock Screw Assembly

2. Lockwasher

3. Counterweight - Motor End

1
2
3

-----

Figure 7.12 Crankshaft Assembly

1. Cap Screw
6
5 2. Cap
7
3. Crankshaft
4. Thrust Washer
8 5. Rotor Drive Key
9 4
6. Connecting Rod
3
7. Compression Ring
2
8. Piston
10
9. Pin
1
10. Retainer

-----

7.8.3 Compressor Reassembly

Clean all compressor parts, using a suitable solvent with proper precautions. Coat all moving parts with the proper
compressor oil before assembly. Refer to Table 7–6 for applicable compressor torque values.

7.8.4 Preparation
a. Suction and Discharge Valves
If the valve seats look damaged or worn, replace valve plate assembly. Always use new valves because it is
difficult to reinstall used valves so that they will seat as before removal. Any valve wear will cause leakage.

7–11 T-363
 Figure 7.13 Suction Valve and Positioning Rings

1. Suction Valve
1
2. Suction Valve Positioning Spring

2 3. Valve Plate Dowel Pin

3

-----
Suction valves are positioned by dowel pins (see Figure 7.13). Do not omit the suction valve positioning springs.
Place the springs so that the ends bear against the cylinder deck (middle bowed away from cylinder deck). Use
new gaskets when reinstalling valve plates and cylinder heads.
b. Compression Rings
The compression ring is chamfered on the inside circumference. This ring is installed with the chamfer toward the
top. Stagger the ring end gaps so they are not aligned.

Figure 7.14 Piston Ring

The gap between the ends of the piston rings can be checked with a feeler gauge by inserting the ring into the piston
bore approximately one inch below the top of the bore. Square the ring in the bore by pushing it slightly with a piston.
The maximum and minimum allowable ring gaps are 0.33 and 0.127mm (0.013 and 0.005 inch) respectively.

T-363 7–12
7.8.5 Installing the Components
1. Push pistons from the inside of the crankcase through the cylinders, be careful not to break rings. Place
rods so that the chamfered side is against radius of crankpins. Install the crankshaft and thrust washer
through the pump end of the compressor. Ensure thrust washer is fitted on locating pin. Do not damage
main bearings. Bring rods in position against crank bearings.
2. Install the pump end thrust washer on the two dowel pins located on the bearing head (see Figure 7.8).

! CAUTION
Ensure that the thrust washer does not fall off dowel pins while installing oil pump.

! CAUTION
The set screw on the crankshaft must be removed for this type of oil pump (see Figure 7.8).

3. Install bearing head assembly with a new gasket on the compressor crankshaft. Carefully push oil pump on
by hand, ensuring the thrust washer remains on the dowel pins. The tang on the end of the drive engages
the slot in the crankshaft, and the oil inlet port on the pump is aligned with the oil pickup tube in the crank-
case. The pump should be mounted flush with the crankcase, and oriented with the oil pick up tube and oil
inlet port, and aligned as shown in Figure 7.8.
4. Align gasket and install eight cap screws in mounting flange. Refer to Table 7–6 for torque values.
5. Install matching connecting rod caps Be sure rod is not bound and crankshaft will turn correctly as each set
of rod bolts is torqued.
6. Be sure key fits properly when installing rotor on shaft. Screw on equalizer tube and lock screw assembly
with lock washer and bend over tabs of lock washer. Assemble suction strainer to motor and cover, and bolt
cover to crankcase. Assemble valve plates and gaskets. Assemble cylinder heads & gaskets. Turn shaft by
hand to see that it moves freely.
7. Install the oil suction screen, the oil suction screen hold down plate, and the bottom plate.

7.8.6 Compressor Oil Level

! CAUTION
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Polyol Ester Oil (POE) - Castrol-Icematic SW20 compres-
sor oil with R-134a. Buy in quantities of one quart or smaller. When using this hygroscopic oil,
immediately reseal. Do not leave container of oil open or contamination will occur.

a. Checking the Oil Level in the Compressor

1. Turn unit on and operate in cooling mode for at least 20 minutes.
2. Check the front oil sight glass on the compressor to ensure that no foaming of the oil is present after 20 min-
utes of operation. If the oil is foaming excessively after 20 minutes of operation, check the refrigerant system
for flood-back of liquid refrigerant. Correct this situation before performing step 3.
3. Turn unit off to check the oil level. The correct oil level range should be between the bottom to one-eighth
level of the sight glass. If the level is above one-eighth, oil must be removed from the compressor. To
remove oil from the compressor, follow step d in this section. If the level is below the bottom of the sight
glass, add oil to the compressor following step b below.
b. Adding Oil with Compressor in System
1. The recommended method is to add oil using an oil pump at the oil fill valve (see item 10, Figure 7.5).
2. In an emergency where an oil pump is not available, oil may be drawn into the compressor through the suc-
tion service valve.

7–13 T-363
 Connect the suction connection of the gauge manifold to compressor suction service valve port and
immerse the common connection of the gauge manifold in a container of refrigeration oil. Extreme care
must be taken to ensure the manifold common connection remains immersed in oil at all times. Other-
wise air and moisture will be drawn into compressor.
Crack the suction service valve and gauge valve to vent a small amount of refrigerant through the com-
mon connection and the oil to purge the lines of air. Close the gauge manifold valve.
With the unit running, frontseat the suction service valve and induce a vacuum in the compressor crank-
case. SLOWLY crack the suction gauge manifold valve and oil will flow through the suction service
valve into the compressor. Add oil as necessary.

c. Adding Oil to Service Replacement Compressor

Service replacement compressors are shipped without oil. If oil is present in crankcase, test the oil to ensure
it is the correct oil and that moisture level is acceptable.
When adding oil to a service replacement compressor add three liters (6.3 pints) using an oil pump at the oil fill
valve (see item 10, Figure 7.5). This quantity is recommended to allow for return of any oil that may be in the
refrigerant system. Install compressor and check oil level after it is placed in operation (refer to Section 7.8.6).
d. Removing Oil from the Compressor
1. If the oil level is above one-eighth sight glass, excess oil must be removed from the compressor.
2. Close (frontseat) suction service valve and pump unit down to 0 to .1 bar (0 to 2 psig).
3. Turn the unit off.
4. Frontseat discharge service valve and remove the remaining refrigerant.
5. Loosen the oil drain plug on the bottom plate of the compressor and drain the proper amount of oil from the com-
pressor to obtain the correct level.
6. Tighten the oil drain plug.
7. Backseat the suction and discharge service valves.
8. Repeat step a to ensure proper oil level.

7.9 High Pressure Switch

7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

NOTE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.

1. Remove switch as outlined in Section 7.9.2.

2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or con-
tinuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed after relieving compressor pressure.
3. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen, see Figure 7.15.
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4kg/cm2 (375psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch should open at
a static pressure up to 25kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a light is used, light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used, the
meter will indicate open circuit.
7. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure. The switch should close at 18kg/cm2 (250 psig).

T-363 7–14
 Figure 7.15 High Pressure Switch Testing

1. Cylinder Valve and Gauge

1 4
2. Pressure Regulator

2 5 3. Nitrogen Cylinder

4. Pressure Gauge (0 to 36 kg/cm2 = 0 to 400 psig)

6
3
5. Bleed-Off Valve

6. 1/4 Inch Connection

-----

7.9.2 Replacing the High Pressure Switch

1. Turn unit start-stop switch OFF. Frontseat both suction and discharge service valves to isolate compressor.
Remove the refrigerant from the compressor.
2. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high pressure switch is located on the center head and is
removed by turning counterclockwise (see Figure 3.3).
3. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying switch settings (refer to Section 7.9.1).
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the compressor per Section 7.6.

7.10 Condenser Coil

The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel copper tubes expanded into copper fins and formed into a “C“
shape with the fourth side of the square formed by the side support bracket.
7.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning
To ensure optimal efficiency of the unit the condenser coil must be clean. The condenser coil should be cleaned at
least once a year, but more frequent cleaning may be required depending on operating conditions. The coil is
cleaned with fresh water sprayed in the reverse direction of the air flow to remove any debris from the coil. A high
pressure washer is not required, mains water pressure is sufficient. To clean the condenser coil perform the
following procedure:

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.

1. Make sure the unit is powered off and the plug is disconnected.
2. Remove the condenser fan grille.
3. Starting from the top of the coil, use a water hose with a nozzle to wash the coil from the inside out.
4. Systematically wash across the inside top face of the coil until the water runs clean.
5. Wash down the center section, and then through the bottom of the coil, continue washing until the water
runs clear.
6. After the coil is clean, rinse the condenser fan to remove any dirt build up from the blades.
7. Replace the condenser fan grille ensuring that it is centered around the fan.

7–15 T-363
7.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal
1. Using a refrigerant reclaim system remove the refrigerant charge.

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.

2. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
3. Remove the condenser fan.
4. Remove the infill panels to the left and right of the condenser fan shroud.
5. Remove the condenser fan shroud.
6. Unplug the condenser fan motor.
7. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the motor wire harness to allow the harness to be slid back
through the side support bracket.
8. Cut the top and bottom drain lines midway between the side support bracket and the first cable tie, approx
150mm (6”) from the side support bracket.
9. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the drain lines to allow the tubes to be slid back through the
side support bracket.
10. Remove filter drier.
11. Unbraze the inlet connection to coil.
12. Remove the cushion clamps securing the liquid line to the top and bottom receiver brackets, retain all
clamps and securing hardware.
13. Place a support under the condenser coil before releasing the coil from the frame.
14. Remove the lower mounting bracket bolts from the inside of the coil.
15. Remove the top mounting bracket bolts and grille extension mount from inside the coil.
16. Remove the side support bracket mounting bolts.
17. Slide the condenser assembly with receiver out of the unit.

7.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation

Before installing the new condenser coil, the receiver assembly and mounting hardware must be removed from the
old coil assembly:
1. From the old coil, unbolt the receiver assembly from side support bracket.
2. Unbraze the receiver assembly from the coil outlet line and remove from the coil assembly.
3. Unbolt the side support bracket from the top and bottom coil supports and remove from old coil.
4. Refit the side support bracket to the new coil ensuring that the top and bottom are flush mounted with the
coil support.

7.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation

Once the side support bracket has been secured to the new condenser coil, the entire assembly is ready to be
installed into the unit:
1. Slide the new condenser coil into place ensuring the coil inlet connection is mated to the pipework and that
the coil is fully supported.
2. Secure the condenser coil into the unit using the retained hardware; refit the mylar and fender washers:
a. Refit the side support bracket bolts.
b. Refit the top support bracket bolts as well as the top grille extension support.
c. Refit the bottom support bracket bolts.

T-363 7–16
3. Braze the condenser coil inlet connection.
4. Insert the receiver pipe work onto the coil outlet and loosely secure the receiver assembly to the side sup-
port bracket with the retained hardware.
5. Braze the outlet connection to the receiver assembly.
6. Install a new filter drier.
7. Replace the liquid line cushion clamps.
8. Secure the receiver assembly to the side support bracket.
9. Pressure / leak test the coil and filter drier connections, refer to Section 7.5.
10. Evacuate the entire unit, refer to Section 7.6.
11. Slide the top and bottom drain lines back into place through the side support bracket.
12. Using the two supplied straight connectors and contact adhesive reconnect the drain lines.
13. Slide the condenser fan motor wiring harness back through the side support bracket and refit to condenser
motor.
14. Replace all wire ties that were removed to properly secure the drain line and wiring.
15. Reseal the wire harness and drain line penetrations with the putty.
16. Slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but do not secure.
17. Refit the condenser fan shroud to the unit. Use the condenser fan as a guide to ensure the shroud is prop-
erly centered around the fan.
18. Remove the condenser fan, and place it on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the cor-
rect position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.16.

Figure 7.16 Condenser Fan Position

37 mm (1.5”)

Fan

Shroud

19. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
20. Refit left and right infill panels.
21. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around the condenser fan.
22. Evacuate the entire unit, refer to Section 7.6.
23. Recharge the unit with the charge shown on the unit serial plate, refer to Section 7.7. It is important for
proper unit operation that the charge is weighed into the unit.

7–17 T-363
7.11 Condenser Fan and Fan Motor
The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the condenser
coil, and discharges the air horizontally through the front of the unit.

7.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace

! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.

1. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
2. Remove the condenser fan by loosening the two set screws.
3. Disconnect the condenser fan motor wiring.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.

4. Note the number of shims on each side of the motor as the same configuration will be required to refit the
new motor.
5. Remove the fan motor mounting hardware and remove motor.
6. Loosely mount the new motor using new lock nuts.
7. Replace the shims in the same configuration as they were removed.
8. Tighten the fan motor mounting bolts to properly secure the motor.
9. To make sure that the motor is aligned properly, slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but
do not secure.
10. Rotate the fan to make sure the fan blades do not contact the shroud:
a. If the fan motor is misaligned vertically, add or remove shims to align.
b. If the fan motor is not properly centered, loosen the mounting bolts, and adjust the motor position on the
bracket, and then secure the motor.
11. Remove the condenser fan, and connect the fan motor wiring to the fan motor.
12. Place the condenser fan on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the correct position,
37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.16.
13. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
14. Refit the left and right infill panels.
15. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around condenser fan.

7.12 Filter-Drier
a. To check filter drier:
1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter-drier by feeling the liquid line inlet and outlet connections of the drier
cartridge. If the outlet feels cooler than the inlet, then the filter-drier should be changed.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator, if indicator shows a high level of moisture, the filter-drier should be
replaced.
b. To replace filter drier:
1. Pump down the unit (refer to Section 7.4) and replace filter-drier.
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with Section 7.6.
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in system and check charge.

T-363 7–18
7.13 Evaporator Coil
The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is
fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must
be open to ensure adequate drainage.

7.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement

1. Pump the unit down. Refer to Section 7.4.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

2. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
6. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor from the coil. Refer to Section 7.22.
7. Remove middle coil support.
8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
10. Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refrigerant charge.

7.14 Evaporator Heaters

Figure 7.17 Heater Arrangement

1. Heater Element
2
1 2. Bracket

3. Retainer

-----
The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set containing
that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next Pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should be
replaced.

7.14.1 Megger Testing the Heaters

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
All of the checks performed during this procedure should be carried out using a 500v Meg-ohm tester.

7–19 T-363
 1. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in the
control box.
2. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 2 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units with a
heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
If readings are between 1 and 2 Mohm, then the heaters need to be re-tested with the following steps:
a. Reconnect the unit to power and power the unit on.
b. Set the unit set point to a minimum of 10°C higher than the current temperature of the container. Allow
the unit to go into heat mode, reach the temperature set point and maintain for 10-15 minutes.
c. Power the unit off. Allow the unit to cool to ambient temperature.
d. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in
the control box.
e. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 1 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units with a
heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
3. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units with a heater access panel:
a. Open the access panel and cut out all wire splices to isolate all heaters inside of the unit.
b. Repeat the Megger test on each individual heater. Connect the ground clip to the outer metal sheath of
the heater and the test clip to one of the wires from the same heater.
c. Replace any heater where the readings are < 1 Mohm.
4. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units without a heater access panel:
a. Remove all six connections from the Heater (HR) contactor load side, which splits the six heaters into
three separate pairs.
b. Identify the following three wires: DHTL, DHML, DHBL. There is one from each load connection.
c. Repeat the Megger test on each pair of heaters to identify the faulty heater pair. Connect the ground clip
from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point on the unit, preferably the ground plate in the control
box. Connect the test clip to one of the wires stated above.
d. Test all three wires and replace any heater pair that has readings < 1 Mohm.
5. If the unit is loaded, and the heater can not be immediately replaced, perform the following steps:
a. Identify the wire at the opposite end of the faulty heater pair: DHTL - DHTR, DHML - DHMR, DHBL -
DHBR.
b. Isolate the two wires.
c. Reconnect the remaining good wiring pairs to their original connections.
d. The unit will fail the PTI test P1-0 at the next pre-trip inspection. Repair action can be taken at that time.
6. If the unit is empty, replace the faulty heater:

! WARNING
Before servicing the unit, make sure the circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and start-stop switch
(ST) are in the OFF position and the power plug is disconnected.
a. With the heater pair identified, remove the upper back panel inside the container.
b. Identify the center point connection for the heater pair (black wiring from heaters) either against the unit
back wall or in the wiring loom.

T-363 7–20
 c. Cut the splice to separate the two heaters.
d. Carry out a Megger check on the two heaters in the same way as for units with heater panel. Replace
any heater where the Megger readings are < 1 Mohms.

NOTE
If all heaters are above the acceptable limit with the wiring disconnected, then this indicates that the
fault was in one or more of the wire splices that were removed.
e. Remove the hold-down clamp securing the heater(s) to the coil.
f. Verify that the heaters are not hot before handling them.
g. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from the coil). Move the heater to
the side enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
h. To install heater, reverse steps.
i. Reconnect all wiring using new splices and heat shrink where needed. The heat shrink MUST have a
'melt-able' liner to ensure that the connections are properly sealed when shrunk. This can be seen as a
'Ring' of melt liner pushed from under the heat shrink at each end of the shrink tube.

NOTE
Failure to use melt liner heat shrink allows moisture to 'wick' up under the heat shrink and cause a
leakage path.

7.15 Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the
refrigeration unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional
grease.
7.15.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
1. Remove access panel by removing mounting bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of unit and remove
the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twisting to unlock and pulling to
separate.
2. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.

7.15.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by hold-
ing the spanner wrench stationary and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 7.18).
2. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the
washers and key.
3. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator
housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer.

7.15.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.

7–21 T-363
 NOTE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the blade is
not damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between the fan blades to
keep it from turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is made up of a material that
will be damaged. It is recommended that an impact wrench be used when removing the blade. Do not
use the impact wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the stainless steel shaft can occur.
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.

Figure 7.18 Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Washer
1
2 3 2. Fan

3. Nut

4. Stator
4
5. Screws, Washers
5
6. Protector

7. Motor

-----
5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81
mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the wiring connector.
6. Replace access the panel making sure that the panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device
is lockwired.

7.16 Evaporator Section Cleaning

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator
stator and fan deck.
Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting
predominantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface
corrosion on the aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and
eventually flake as a lightweight white powder.

T-363 7–22
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes,
for example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate
infestations of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil-born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet
evaporator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles. However, it is
still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of the unit be
thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent (Tri-Pow’r®
HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodging of the
corrosive elements. This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can
be ordered through any of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371-88. As a general safety precaution, before
using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS) sheet.
Prior to Cleaning:
• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings - food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non-diluted
cleaner is not recommended.
Cleaning Procedure:
1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.
2. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes.
5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.

7.17 Thermostatic Expansion Valve

The thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) (see Figure 3.2) is an automatic device that maintains constant superheat
of the refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator, regardless of suction pressure.
TXV functions are:
• Automatic control of the refrigerant flow to match the evaporator load.
• Prevention of liquid refrigerant entering compressor.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the
thermal bulb is tightly secured and properly insulated. See Figure 7.19.

NOTE
TXV Bulb Clamp is soldered to the suction line.

7–23 T-363
 Figure 7.19 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb
1. Thumbscrew
1
2
2. TXV Bulb Clamp
3
3. Suction Line

4 4. TXV Bulb

5. Foam Insulation
5

-----
7.17.1 Checking Superheat

NOTE
Proper superheat measurement should be completed at -18°C (0°F) container box temperature where
possible.
1. Open the upper right (EFM#1) access panel (see Figure 3.1) to expose the expansion valve.
2. Attach a temperature sensor near the expansion valve bulb and insulate. Make sure the suction line is clean
and that firm contact is made with the sensor.
3. Connect an accurate gauge to the service port directly upstream of the suction modulating valve.
4. Set the temperature set point to -18°C (0°F) and run unit until conditions stabilize.
5. The readings may cycle from a high to a low reading. Take readings of temperature and pressure every
three to five minutes for a total of 5 or 6 readings.
6. From the temperature/pressure chart (Table ), determine the saturation temperature corresponding to the
evaporator outlet test pressures at the suction modulation valve.
7. Subtract the saturation temperatures in step f from the temperatures measured in step e. The difference is
the superheat of the suction gas. Determine the average superheat. It should be 4.5 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F).

7.17.2 TXV Replacement

NOTES
1. The TXV is a hermetic valve, it does not have adjustable superheat (See Figure 7.20).
2. All connections on the hermetic TXV are bi-metallic, copper on the inside and stainless on the outside.
3. All joints on the hermetic TXV (inlet, outlet and equalizer lines) are brazed.
4. Bi-metallic connections heat up very quickly.

Figure 7.20 Thermostatic Expansion Valve

1. Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve

6 2. Non-adjustable Superheat Stem

1 3. Equalizer Connection
5
2 4. Inlet Connection

3 5. Outlet Connection
4
6. Hermetic Expansion Valve Bulb

-----

T-363 7–24
a. Removing the TXV:
1. Pump down the unit per Section 7.4.
2. If TXV replacement is to be performed from the front of the unit, open the upper right (EFM#1) access panel
(see Figure 3.1) to remove evaporator fan motor.
3. Remove cushion clamp that secures the valve body to the bracket.
4. Unbraze the equalizer connection (1/4”), the outlet connection (5/8”), and then the inlet connection (3/8”). See
Figure 7.22. Be careful to protect the insulation on the heaters and their wires.
5. Open the insulation flap. Flap is secured with Velcro (Item 3, Figure 7.21).
6. Loosen the thumb screw and slide the bulb, out by pulling it towards the front of the unit.

Figure 7.21 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb Location

1. Hermetic Expansion Valve Bulb

4

3 2. Insulation

3. Insulation Flap

4. Velcro strip
2
6 5. Bulb Clamp
5
1
6. Thumb Screw
-----
b. Installing the TXV
1. Braze inlet connection to inlet line (see Figure 7.22).
2. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.
3. Braze the equalizer connection to the equalizer line.
4. Reinstall the cushion clamp.
5. Thread the thermal bulb through the opening above the evaporator coil (see Figure 3.2), and slide it under
the strap and secure the thumb screw. Close the insulation flap. Reinstall bulb access panel.
6. Check superheat (refer to step 7.16.1).

Figure 7.22 Hermetic Thermostatic Expansion Valve Brazing Procedure

Braze Rod (’Sil-Phos” = 5.5% Silver, 6% Phosphorus)

Copper Tube
(Apply heat for 10-15 seconds)

Bi-metallic Tube Connection Use of a wet cloth is not necessary due to rapid
(Apply heat for 2-5 seconds) heat dissipation of the bi-metallic connections

7.18 Suction Modulation Valve

On start up of the unit, the SMV will reset to a known open position. This is accomplished by assuming the valve was
fully open, driving it fully closed, resetting the percentage open to zero, then opening to a known 21% staging position.

7–25 T-363
 Figure 7.23 Suction Modulation Valve (SMV)

2 1/8 Inch Nut

7.18.1 Pre-Check Procedure

1. Check unit for abnormal operation.
2. Check charge. If refrigerant is low repair as required and again check operation.
3. If sufficient capacity cannot be maintained or unit is tripping excessively on high pressure switch (HPS) in
high ambients, check coils and clean if required.
4. If capacity or control cannot be maintained, turn unit OFF, then back ON. This will reset the SMV in the event
the controller lost communication with the valve, and may correct the problem.

NOTE
Carefully listen to the valve. During reset, the valve will make a ratcheting noise that may be heard or
felt as it is attempting to close. If this can be heard or felt, it indicates that the controller and drive mod-
ule are attempting to close the valve, and may serve as a quick indication that the drive module is in
working order.
5. During the first few minutes of unit operation, compressor reliability enhancement logic (CREL) may be in
effect. This places the valve at a 21% staging position and is sufficient to drive the temperature of the supply
probe down several degrees during this interval.
6. After the CREL time-out has been met, the valve will start responding to the control logic and open or close
relative to the demand. Scrutinize the unit operation for a few minutes. While in pulldown, the unit will open
the SMV to a maximum discharge pressure of 325 psig in high ambient conditions, or as much as the cur-
rent setting and control logic will allow. The current level should be high. A lower discharge pressure will be
seen in lower ambient temperatures. Once the unit has reached set point, the SMV will go into control
mode. Both the discharge/suction pressures, and current draw will go significantly lower. Once below set
point, the suction pressure should go into a vacuum within several minutes. Should the operation differ as
mentioned, the SMV, controller, or wiring, may be faulty.
7. Check for correct wire location at the stepper motor plug and the environmental connector (EC). Make sure
that the wires terminate in accordance with the wire markings (addresses).
8. Attach a manifold gauge set (refer to Section 7.2). If the unit is operating in the perishable mode, proceed to
step i. If the unit is operating in the frozen mode, proceed to step j.
9. Perishable operation: If the operation of the unit is in question, place the set point to approximately 6°C
(11°F) less than the current box temperature, so the unit goes into pulldown. Run the unit for approximately
one minute. Record readings on gauges and current draw. The current draw and pressures should go up.
Place set point 0.5°C (0.9°F) above current box temperature to fully modulate valve, and run for approxi-
mately one minute.

NOTE
The unit may shut off for a short time. Wait until the unit self starts and sufficient time has elapsed to
cause the valve to fully modulate. Record new gauge readings and current draw. The suction pressure
should go into a vacuum and the current draw should have gone down. If little or no change to the suc-
tion pressure or current draw occurs, this is an indication of a malfunctioning SMV.

T-363 7–26
 10. Frozen operation: In frozen mode the valve tends to stay open as much as possible. Again, this is depen-
dent upon current limit setting and control logic. Turn the unit OFF and ON, as in the perishable mode, and
watch the gauges. The valve will run at 21% open if CREL logic is active, and will open to maximum allow-
able after this. Depending on ambient conditions, there should be an increase in suction pressure and cur-
rent draw as the valve opens. However, at times, this may be difficult to fully determine.
11. If the unit still does not operate properly, stop unit and proceed to the following step to check out the SMV
system.

7.19 Valve Override Controls

Cd41 is a configurable function code that allows manual operation of the SMV valve for troubleshooting. Test
sequences are provided in Table 7–1.
PCnt (% Setting - SMV Capacity Modulation) allows opening of the SMV to various percentages.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is provided to enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which the override is
active. If the timer is active, the valve override selection will take place immediately. If the timer is not active, changes
will not take place for a few seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times out, override function is
automatically terminated and the valve returns to normal machinery control. To operate the override, do the following:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an ARROW key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window. The
right window will display a controller communications code.
2. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test name alternating with the test setting or time remain-
ing. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired test. Press the ENTER key and SELCt will appear in the left
display.
3. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired setting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections are provided
in the following table.
4. If the timer is not operating, follow the above procedure to display the timer. Use an ARROW key to scroll to
the desired time interval and press ENTER to start the timer.
5. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.

Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays

Left Display Controller Communication Codes Setting Codes (Right Display)
(Right Display)
Cd 41/SELCt tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
PCnt AUtO
(% Setting - SMV Capacity Modulation) (Normal Machinery Control)
0, 3, 6, 10, 25, 50, 100
7.19.1 Checking the Stepper Valve
a. Checking with ohmmeter
Stop the unit, disconnect the 4-pin connector to the stepper SMV. With a reliable digital ohmmeter, check the
winding resistance. In normal ambient, the valve should have 72 to 84 ohms measured on the red/green (a-b
terminals) and on the white/black (c-d terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero reading occurs, check connections and
replace the motor. If near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed to step 7.18.2 to check out the controller.
b. Checking with SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester
The SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00375-00) is a battery-operated stepper drive
that will open and close the SMV, allowing a more thorough check of the motor.
1. Stop the unit, disconnect the 4-pin connector from the stepper module to the valve (see Figure 7.23) and
attach the SMA-12 stepper drive to the connector going to the valve.
2. Set the SMA-12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS and either open or close valve. Each LED should light
sequentially until all four are lit. Any LED failing to light indicates an open on that leg, which indicates a poor
connection or an open coil. Repair or replace as required to achieve proper operation.

7–27 T-363
 3. Restart unit, set the step rate to 200PPS on SMA-12 for the valve, and close stepper valve while watching the
suction gauge. Within one minute the suction pressure will go into a vacuum. This is an indication that the valve
is moving.
4. If no change in suction pressure is detected, check for resistance, and check connections for proper conti-
nuity and retest. If the valve is functioning, and all connections and motor resistance are good, check the
drive module.
5. If the valve is determined to be faulty after completing the above steps, perform a low side pump down.
Remove valve powerhead assembly, and replace with a NEW valve powerhead assembly, torque nut to
35ft-lb, evacuate low side, and open all service valves.

! CAUTION
DO NOT disassemble piston from NEW suction modulating valve powerhead assembly. Doing
so may result in damage to piston.

7.19.2 Checking the Controller

1. Turn unit OFF.
2. With voltmeter set to read 20 volts DC, attach the positive lead to MC1 of the 4-pin connector and the nega-
tive lead to the TP9. Turn ON unit and watch the volt meter. After a short delay, the reading should remain
unchanged at 0 volts. If 5VDC, make sure the jumper wire from MC1 to MC8 is in place; if not, install and
retest.

7.19.3 SMV Emergency Repair Procedure

In the event of an SMV failure, and replacement components are not readily available, the system can be
bypassed by removing the SMV valve piston. To remove the piston, do the following:
1. Perform a low side pump down (refer to Section 7.4).
2. Remove SMV powerhead by loosening the 2-1/8 inch diameter nut (see Figure 7.23) to relieve any pres-
sure and then sliding the powerhead out.
3. Remove the piston by loosening the Allen screw and removing the piston and screw.
4. Install the powerhead assembly (without the piston) and torque to 35 to 40ft-lbs.
5. Open all valves.
6. Start the unit.
7. Adjust the suction service valve so that the approximate temperature OR current limit is maintained. For per-
ishable loads, it is recommended that the adjustment be made so that the available capacity is slightly larger
than the load. The unit will cycle OFF and ON.
8. Once repair parts become available, repair as required.

7.20 Autotransformer
If the unit does not start, check the following:
1. Make sure the 460VAC (yellow) power cable is plugged into the receptacle (item 3, Figure 5.1) and locked
in place.
2. Make sure circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in,
check voltage supply.
3. There is no internal protector for this transformer design; therefore, no checking of the internal protector is
required.
4. Using a voltmeter and with the primary supply circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230VAC). The transformer is defective if output voltage is not available.

T-363 7–28
7.21 Controller
7.21.1 Handling Controller

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from circuit boards unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap or equivalent static drain device.

! CAUTION
Remove the controller module and unplug all connectors before performing any arc welding
on any part of the container.

The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the Controller/DataCORDER
module. These precautions and procedures should be implemented when replacing the module, when doing any
arc welding on the unit, or when service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of the controller.
1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00304-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential electro-
static buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place and/
or service the controller.
2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
4. Carefully remove the controller, refer to Section 7.21.4. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if
possible. Place the module on the static mat.
5. The strap should be worn during any service work on the controller, even when it is placed on the mat.

7.21.2 Controller Troubleshooting

A group of test points (TP) (see Figure 7.24) are provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical circuits
(see schematic diagram, Section 8). A description of the test points follows:

NOTE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage between TPs and ground (TP9), except for TP8.

TP 1 - NA

TP 2 - This test point enables the user to check if the internal protector for the compressor motor (IP-CP) or high
pressure switch is open.

TP 3 - This test point enables the user to check if the water pressure switch (WP) contact is open or closed.

TP 4 - This test point enables the user to check if the internal protector for the condenser fan motor (IP-CM) is open
or closed.

TP 5 - This test point enables the user to check if the internal protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or
IP-EM2) are open or closed.

TP 6 - This test point enables the user to check if the controller water tank heater relay (TQ) is open or closed.

TP 7 - This test point is not used in this application.

TP 8 - This test point is not applicable to the units covered herein.

TP 9 - This test point is the chassis (unit frame) ground connection.

TP 10 - This test point enables the user to check if the heat termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.

7–29 T-363
 Figure 7.24 Controller Section of the Control Box

1. Controller Software Programming Port

2 3
2. Mounting Screw

3. Controller

4. Test Points

-----
7.21.3 Controller Programming Procedure
To load new software into the module, the programming card (PCMIA) is inserted into the programming/ software port.

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

Loading Operational Software:

1. Turn unit OFF via start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming card containing the following (example) files into the programming/software
port (see Figure 7.24):
menuDDMM.ml3 - This file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3 - Multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON via start-stop switch (ST).
4. The display module will display the message ruN COnFG. If a defective card is being used, the display will blink
the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.
5. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display reads, LOAd 51XX for Recip.
6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. The display will alternate to between PrESS EntR and rEV XXXX.
7. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
8. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute.
9. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
10. The display module will go blank briefly, then read “Pro donE” when the software is loaded. If a problem
occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn start-stop
switch OFF and remove the card.
11. Turn unit OFF via start-stop switch (ST).
12. Remove the programming card from the programming/ software port and return the unit to normal operation
by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.

T-363 7–30
 13. Turn power on and wait 15 seconds. The status LED will flash quickly and there will be no display. The con-
troller is loading the new software into memory. This takes about 15 seconds.
When complete the controller will reset and power up normally.
14. Wait for default display - setpoint on the left and control temperature on the right.
15. Confirm software is correct using keypad code select 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.
16. Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.

Loading Configuration Software:

1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port (see Figure 7.24):
menuDDMM.ml3 - This file allows the user to select the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3 - Multi-configuration file.
recp54XX.ml3 - Controller software program for recip units.
3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
4. The display module will display the message ruN COnFG. If a defective card is being used, the display will
blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “541 00.” Based on the operational software
installed.
7. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model dash number. (If a
defective card is being used, the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and
remove the card.)
8. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
9. When the software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.”
(If a problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.”
Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
10. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
11. Remove the programming card from the programming/ software port and return the unit to normal operation
by placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
12. Confirm correct model configuration using the keypad to choose code select 20 (CD20). The model dis-
played should match the unit serial number plate.

7.21.4 Removing and Installing the Controller

Two different replacement controllers are available:
1. Re-manufactured - Controller is the equivalent of a new OEM controller and is supplied with a 12 month
warranty.
2. Repaired - Controller has had previous faults repaired and upgraded with the latest software.

NOTE
Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for warranty repairs. Only full OEM re-manufactured control-
lers are to be used.

Replacement controllers will be factory equipped with the latest version of operational software, but will NOT be
configured for a specific model number and will need to be configured at the time of installation or sale.
a. Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of way.
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted. Loosen the top mounting screw (see Figure 7.24) and lift up and out.

7–31 T-363
 3. Disconnect the two back connectors (EC) and remove module.
4. When removing the replacement controller from its packaging, note how it is packaged. When returning the old
controller for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging has been
designed to protect the controller from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during storage and transit.
b. Installation:
Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
Torque values for mounting screws (item 2, see Figure 7.24) are 0.23mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value for the
connectors is 0.12mkg (10 inch-pounds).

7.21.5 Battery Replacement

Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
3. Install new batteries and slide bracket into control box slot.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Disconnect battery wire connector from control box.
3. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
4. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the control box slot.
5. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box and replace wire ties that were removed.
Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Open control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
3. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug positions 14, 13, 11.
4. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00418-00, remove the 4 screws securing the display
module to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon cable and set the display module aside.

NOTE
The battery wires must face toward the right.
5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from the
new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
bracket around the battery, and back through the bracket.
6. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re-install the display.
7. Route the battery wires from the battery along the display harness and connect the red battery wire and one
end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to
“KA13.”
8. Replace wire ties that were removed.

7.22 Temperature Sensor Service

Service procedures for service of the return recorder, return temperature, supply recorder, supply temperature,
ambient, defrost temperature, compressor discharge and compressor suction temperature sensors are provided in
the following sub paragraphs.

T-363 7–32
7.22.1 Ice Bath Preparation
The ice-water bath is a method for testing the accuracy of sensors by submerging the sensors in an insulated
container with ice cubes or chipped ice, then filling voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches
0°C (32°F) measured on a laboratory thermometer.

Notes:
• Wherever possible, use a thermometer that is regularly calibrated by an accredited test lab. Contact your
instrument representative if the reference thermometer is not showing correct readings.
• Always use a temperature measurement reference instrument which is of higher accuracy than the device
checked – for e.g., a thermometer with a rated accuracy of +/- 0.2 °C should be used to check a device with
a rated accuracy +/- 0.3 °C.
• A thermally insulated container, tub open to atmosphere and large enough to contain crushed ice and water
should be used. The tub should be large enough to contain the unit’s sensor and the reference thermometer.
• Enough distilled water should be available to make ice cubes and to set up a proper and stable ice-water tri-
ple-point mixture. Prepare ice using distilled water.
• Pre-cool distilled water for testing.

Procedure:

1. Prepare a mixture of clean ice using distilled water in a clean insulated container. If possible, the person
handling should be wearing latex gloves.

a. Crush or chip the ice to completely fill the container. The finer the ice particles, the more accurate the
mixture.
b. Add enough pre-cooled distilled water to fill the container.
c. Stir the mixture for a minimum of 2 minutes to ensure water is completely cooled and good mixing has
occurred.
d. The mixture should generally contain about 85% ice with the distilled water occupying the rest of the
space.
e. Add more ice as the ice melts.
2. Stir the ice water slurry mixture to maintain a temperature 0°C (32°F).
3. Constantly monitor the temperature of the ice water slurry with your reference thermometer. Ensure that the
temperature of the bath has stabilized. The criterion for stability generally is to take two readings at 1 minute
intervals, and the two readings should give you 0°C (32°F).

7.22.2 Sensor Checkout Procedure

To verify that accuracy of a temperature sensor:
1. Remove the sensor from the bracket and place in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is pre-
pared by filling an insulated container (of sufficient size to completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or
chipped ice, then filling voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches 0°C (32°F) mea-
sured on a laboratory thermometer.
2. Start unit and check sensor reading on the control panel. The reading should be 0C (32F). If the reading is
correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with the following:
3. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply.
4. Refer to Section 7.21 and remove controller to gain access to the sensor plugs.
5. Using the plug connector marked “EC,” that is connected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, CPDS OR CPSS as required). Follow those wires to the connec-
tor and using the pins of the plug, measure the resistance. Values are provided in Table 7–2 or Table 7–3.
Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers, or other test equipment, a reading
within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance read-
ing will usually be much higher or lower than the resistance values given.

7–33 T-363
 Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 336,500 6 42.8 24,173
-39 -38.2 314,773 7 44.6 23,017
-38 -36.4 294,600 8 46.4 21,922
-37 -34.6 275,836 9 48.2 20,886
-36 -32.8 258,336 10 50 19,900
-35 -31 242,850 11 51.8 18,975
-34 -29.2 228,382 12 53.6 18,093
-33 -27.4 214,164 13 55.4 17,258
-32 -25.6 200,909 14 57.2 16,466
-31 -23.8 188,545 15 59 15,715
-30 -22.0 177,000 16 60.8 15,002
-29 -20.2 166,360 17 62.6 14,325
-28 -18.4 156,426 18 64.4 13,683
-27 -16.6 147,148 19 66.2 13,073
-26 -14.8 138,478 20 68 12,494
-25 -13 130,374 21 69.8 11,944
-24 -11.2 122,794 22 71.6 11,420
-23 -9.4 115,702 23 73.4 10,923
-22 -7.6 109,063 24 75.2 10,450
-21 -5.8 102,846 25 77 10,000
-20 -4 97,022 26 78.8 9,572
-19 -2.2 91,563 27 80.6 9,164
-18 -0.4 86,445 28 82.4 8,777
-17 1.4 81,644 29 84.2 8,407
-16 3.2 77,139 30 86 8,055
-15 5 72,910 31 87.8 7,720
-14 6.8 68,938 32 89.6 7,401
-13 8.6 65,206 33 91.4 7,096
-12 10.4 61,699 34 93.2 6,806
-11 12.2 58,401 35 95 6,529
-10 14 55,330 36 96.8 6,265
-9 15.8 52,381 37 98.6 6,013
-8 17.6 49,634 38 100.4 5,772
-7 19.4 47,047 39 102.2 5,543
-6 21.2 44,610 40 104.0 5,323
-5 23 42,314 41 105.8 5,114
-4 24.8 40,149 42 107.6 4,914
-3 26.6 38,108 43 109.4 4,723
-2 28.4 36,182 44 111.2 4,540
-1 30.2 34,365 45 113 4,365
0 32 32,650 46 114.8 4,198
1 33.8 31,030 47 116.6 4,038
2 35.6 29,500 48 118.4 3,885
3 37.4 28,054 49 120.2 3,739
4 39.2 26,688 50 122 3,599
5 41 25,396

T-363 7–34
 Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - PrimeLINE CPDS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 849,822 18 64.4 136,705
-38 -36.4 834,450 20 68.0 124,876
-36 -32.8 819,079 22 71.6 114,101
-34 -29.2 803,707 24 75.2 104,352
-32 -25.6 788,336 25 77 100,000
-30 -22.0 772,964 26 78.8 95,585
-28 -18.4 757,593 28 82.4 87,619
-26 -14.8 742,221 30 83.0 80,447
-24 -11.2 726,849 32 89.6 73,931
-22 -7.6 711,478 34 93.2 68,000
-20 -4.0 696,106 36 96.8 62,599
-18 -0.4 680,735 38 100.4 57,657
-16 3.2 665,363 40 104.0 53,200
-14 6.8 649,992 42 107.6 49,117
-12 10.4 620,224 44 111.2 45,367
-10 14.0 563,722 46 114.8 41,965
-8 17.6 507,219 48 118.4 38,840
-6 21.2 450,717 50 122.0 35,991
-4 24.8 403,140 52 125.6 33,369
-2 28.4 365,427 54 129.2 30,967
0 32.0 327,715 56 132.8 28,753
2 35.6 295,834 58 136.4 26,733
4 39.2 267,922 60 140.0 24,867
6 42.8 241,618 62 143.6 23,152
8 46.4 219,659 64 147.2 21,570
10 50.0 198,927 66 150.8 20,827
12 53.6 180,987 68 154.4 20,112
14 57.2 164,687 70 158.0 18,768
16 60.8 149,680 72 161.6 16,375

7.22.3 GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration

European Commission GDP (Good Distribution Practices) guidelines, which are used worldwide, call for the
equipment used to control or monitor environments where medicinal products are stored or transported be
calibrated in accordance with pharmaceutical shipper specifications, typically every six months or annually.
This procedure explains how to perform a GDP calibration of the supply (STS/SRS) and return (RTS/RRS) sensors
using DataLINE software version 3.1 or higher. The calibration procedure should be conducted in pairs (STS/SRS,
or RTS/RRS) and it is recommended to calibrate before the full pre-trip inspection.

7–35 T-363
 ! WARNING
Before removing the Supply or Return air sensors from the unit, turn the ON/OFF switch and
circuit breaker to the OFF position. Disconnect the power plug from the unit. Follow proper
lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot inadvertently be energized. It is
important that all dismantling work is done and tools and personnel are away from the unit
before powering on the unit for calibration.

! WARNING
When performing the Return Air Sensor calibration, disconnect both evaporator motors.

Before proceeding with the calibration procedure, ensure that controller software version is 5368 or
higher and DataLINE version 3.1 or higher is installed onto the download device. Only the latest
DataLINE and controller software will allow users to carry out Good Distribution Practice (GDP)
calibration. Do not downgrade the software after installing the latest software.

Before proceeding with the calibration procedure, it is recommended to check the sensors by running
pre-trip P5-0. This test checks the sensor values. If the test fails, identify and correct the faulty sensor
and rerun the test.

Tools Required:
• Socket screwdrivers set
• Phillips screwdriver
• Standard hand tools
• Interrogator cable
• Laptop with DataLINE 3.1 or above installed
• Clean insulated container for distilled water and ice
• A regularly calibrated reference thermometer, recommended to be of accuracy up to 2 decimal place.

GDP Calibration, Removing Supply Sensors (STS/SRS) from Unit:

1. Locate the supply sensors cover assembly on the suction side of the compressor. Remove the two
fasteners securing the cover of the sensors (see Figure 7.25).
2. Remove the cover and rotate the supply air sensors, STS/SRS, in a clockwise direction and remove the
sensors from the sensor housing (see Figure 7.25).

Figure 7.25 Supply Sensors - Cover Assembly and Sensors

T-363 7–36
GDP Calibration, Removing Return Sensors (RTS/RRS) from Unit:
1. Remove both front access panels from the unit by removing 8 fasteners from each panel (see Figure 7.26).
Save all hardware for re-installation.

Figure 7.26 Removing Front Access Panels

2. On the right side, disconnect the fan motor wiring, loosen the fastener and remove (slide) the evaporator
motor from the unit (see Figure 7.27).

Figure 7.27 Removing Evaporator Motor

3. Loosen the fastener on the sensor bracket (see Figure 7.28).

Figure 7.28 Return Sensors - Bracket

7–37 T-363
 4. Cut all the wire ties (see Figure 7.29) that are securing the sensors to the harness and remove sensor.

Figure 7.29 Return Sensors - Cutting Wire Ties

GDP Calibration, Perform Calibration:

1. Connect the interrogator cable to the interrogator port. Then, power on the unit.

! WARNING
Before powering on the unit, it is important to ensure that all dismantling work is done and
tools are away and service personnel are not working on the unit at the time of power on.

2. Open DataLINE version 3.1 or above. From the DataLINE launch pad, click on the Probe Calibration button
(see Figure 7.30) to go to the Probe Calibration screen. A pop-up window will appear reminding the user to
ensure proper ice bath temperature. Click OK to acknowledge.

Figure 7.30 DataLINE - Probe Calibration

T-363 7–38
3. On the Probe Calibration screen, click on the Calibrate Supply sensors or Calibrate Return sensors button
(see Figure 7.31).

Figure 7.31 DataLINE - Calibrate Sensors Button

4. A Location of Service pop-up window will appear (see Figure 7.32). In the appropriate fields, enter the
Service Center Name and Service Center Location where the calibration is being performed. Then, click the
Save button. A pop-up window will appear reminding the user to ensure proper ice bath temperature. Click
OK to acknowledge and remember to maintain the Ice bath at 0°C (32°F).

Figure 7.32 DataLINE - Enter Service Center Information

5. Prepare the ice bath. Refer to the Ice Bath Preparation procedure.
Ensure that the set-up (i.e. ice bath, sensors, reference thermometer) has reached a stable state before
beginning the calibration process. Ensure that the set-up is clean and the reference thermometer is reg-
ularly maintained and calibrated.

7–39 T-363
 6. Place the ice bath in a location near sensors (see Figure 7.33). For Return Sensors, place the ice bath on
an elevated platform (ladder) of appropriate height.

Figure 7.33 Ice Bath

7. Once temperature stability is ensured, submerge the sensors in the ice water slurry. Make certain that the
sensors do not contact the container sides or bottom, or each other. Continuously stir the slurry mixture
during calibration.
8. Ensure that the Ice bath is at 0°C (32°F) using the calibrated reference thermometer. Confirm that the
sensor readings have stabilized and the sensors are within +/- 0.3°C (0.5°F). The readings can be taken
from the Uncal column in the Current Probe Offset Temperatures table.
9. Then, after confirming the sensor readings have stabilized, click on the Start Cal button (see Figure 7.34).
After clicking Start Cal, the process begins automatically and will complete in less than 5 minutes. Continue
to stir the ice bath during testing. Calibration will fail if the stability cannot be achieved or the sensor offset is
greater than 0.3°C (0.5°F).

Figure 7.34 DataLINE - Start Cal Button

T-363 7–40
 10. Once the calibration has completed, a pop-up will appear with the message Calibrate Complete. Click OK to
acknowledge and the results will then be displayed on the screen in the Results column (see Figure 7.35).
Calibration will fail if the stability cannot be achieved or the sensor offset is greater than 0.3°C (0.5°F).
The validity of a sensor can be checked by hand warming the sensors to see if there are changes in the
readings on the DataLINE screen. If calibration will not complete, replace and recalibrate the sensors.
Refer to the Sensor Replacement procedure.

Figure 7.35 DataLINE - Calibration Results

11. After completing the calibration event, download a DCX file and check that all of the following information is
captured: service center name, location, the results of the calibration and the offset applied. Ensure that all
the information is captured and the event is considered a success when all the intended sensors in
calibration have passed.

NOTE
If there is “uncal” in the download, it means that the calibration process was not completed.

After the completion of the calibration, restore the unit to its original state.

7.22.4 Sensor Replacement

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. For two wire sensors, cut cable 5cm (2 inches) from shoulder of defective sensor and discard the defective
sensor only. For 3-wire sensors, cut at 23cm (9 inches). Slide the cap and grommet off well mounted sensor
and save for possible reuse. Do not cut the grommet.
3. If required, prepare the replacement sensor by cutting sensor wire(s) back 40mm (1-1/2 inch). For 3-wire
sensors, the black wire should be cut at the middle length and the red/white wire cut to the shorter length
(See Figure 7.36).
4. Prepare the cables by cutting wires to the opposite of the sensor (See Figure 7.37).

7–41 T-363
 Figure 7.36 Sensor Types

Sensor
40 mm (1 1/2 inch)

6.3 mm (1/4 inch)

Mounting Stud Type

40 mm (1-1/2 inches)
6.3 mm (1/4 inch)

Sensor Bulb Type

When installing a single wire color two wire sensor, cut one wire of existing two wire cable 40mm (1-1/2
inch) shorter than the other wire.
When replacing two single sensors with a combination (3-wire) sensor, the black wires of the cables
should be cut to the same length and the red wire of one cable cut to the shorter length.
When replacing a original 3-wire sensor, cut the black wire to the middle length and the red wire to the
shorter length.
5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3mm (1/4 inch).
6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place small pieces of heat shrink tubing, one
over each wire, before adding crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.37.
7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor. If the replacement sensor is
of a larger diameter than the original, a different grommet may be required.
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
10. Slide heat shrink tubing over splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in Figure 7.37.
11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois-
ture seepage.
12. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance. m.Rein-
stall sensor, refer to Section 7.22.5.

NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to inactivate probe alarms (refer to Section 5.9).

T-363 7–42
 Figure 7.37 Sensor and Cable Splice

REPLACEMENT 2 WIRE TO 2 WIRE OR 3 WIRE TO 3 WIRE

Cable

Sensor
REPLACEMENT FOR DUAL, SINGLE SENSOR CONFIGURATION
Cables

RED
BLACK
Sensor
Heat Shrink Tubing Large Heat Shrink Tubing RED/WHITE

7.22.5 Sensor Re-Installation

a. Sensors STS/SRS
To properly position a supply sensor, the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder. This positioning will
give the sensor the optimum amount of exposure to the supply air stream, and will allow the Controller to operate
correctly. Insufficient probe insertion into the probe holder will result in poor temperature control due to the lack of
air flow over the sensor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not contact the evaporator back panel. The design minimum
clearance of 6mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see Figure 7.38).
b. Sensor RTS/RRS
Reinstall the return sensor as shown in Figure 7.39. For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position
the seal section of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp.
c. Sensor DTS
The DTS sensor must have insulating material placed completely over the sensor to insure the coil metal
temperature is sensed.

Figure 7.38 Supply Sensor Positioning

1. Sensor Wires
1
2. Cap and Grommet Assembly
2 3. Probe Holder

4. Evaporator Back Panel

4
5. Supply Air Stream

3 6. Supply Sensor
5

6 6 mm
(1/4 inch)

-----

7–43 T-363
 Figure 7.39 Return Sensor Positioning

1. Evaporator Grille
1
2. Combination Sensor (Mount in either Clamp)
2
3. Seal

4. Mounting Clamp

3
4

-----

7.23 Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

The vent position sensor (VPS) determines the position of the fresh air vent in near real-time via the Cd45. The
fresh air VPS alarm (AL50) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for five minutes or if the sensor is outside of
its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defective. To confirm a defective
panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit.
The alarm should immediately go inactive. Check the four-minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after
the four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the panel should be replaced. If the alarm
immediately reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
To replace the VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel equipped with VPS.
Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibration as follows:
1. Rotate the vent to the 0CMH/CFM position.
2. Code select Cd45 will automatically be displayed. Press the Enter key and hold for five seconds.
3. After the enter key has been pressed, the display will read CAL (for calibration).
4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds.
5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will display 0 CMH / CFM.

7.24 eAutoFresh Service

Procedures and technical information related to the eAutoFresh™ venting system can be found in the T-342
eAutoFresh Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the manual
from the Literature section, click on Options > eAutoFresh

7.25 XtendFRESH Service

Procedures and technical information related to the XtendFRESH™ controlled atmosphere system can be found in
the T-366 XtendFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find
the manual from the Literature section, click on Options > XtendFRESH.

7.26 Maintenance of Painted Surfaces

The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the
refrigeration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere or if the protective paint system is scratched or
damaged, clean area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper, or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately
following cleaning, spray or brush on zinc-rich primer. After the primer has dried, spray or brush on finish coat of
paint to match original unit color.

T-363 7–44
7.27 Communications Interface Module Installation
Figure 7.40 Communications Interface Installation

CB1 Communicatio ns
Interface Module

Units with communication interface module provision have the required wiring installed. The provision wiring kit
(part number 76-00685-00), includes three pre-addressed wires installed between the circuit breaker and
communication interface module locations. These wires are to be connected to the module and circuit breaker to
allow the module to communicate over the power system.

7.27.1 Installing the Module

! WARNING
The unit power plug must be disconnected to remove power from circuit breaker CB1

1. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND that the
unit power plug is disconnected.
2. Open control box, see Figure 7.40 and remove low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.
3. Remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the control box.
4. Locate wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire harness. Remove
the protective heat shrink from the ends of the wires.
5. Attach the three wires as addressed to the LOAD side of the circuit breaker.
6. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
7. Fit the new RMU into the unit.
8. Remove plugs CIA, CIB and CID from the wiring harness and attach to the module.
9. Replace the low voltage shield.

7–45 T-363
 Table 7–4 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
Bolt Diameter Threads In-Lb Ft-Lb N-m
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9

Table 7–5 Wear Limits For Compressors

Maximum Wear Before
Factory Maximum Factory Minimum
Part Name Repair
inches mm inches mm inches mm
MAIN BEARING
Main Bearing Diameter 1.6268 41.3207 .0020 0.0508
Main Bearing Journal Diameter 1.6233 41.2318 .0020 0.0508
PUMP END
Main Bearing Diameter 1.3760 34.9504 .0020 0.0508
Main Bearing Journal Diameter 1.3735 34.8869 .0020 0.0508
CONNECTING ROD 1.3768 34.9707 .0020 0.0508
Piston Pin Bearing 0.6878 17.4701 .0010 0.0254
CRANKPIN DIAMETER 1.3735 34.8869 .0025 0.0635
Throw 1.072 27.2288 1.070 27.1780
THRUST WASHER (Thickness) 0.154 3.9116 0.1520 03.8608 .0250 0.6350

T-363 7–46
 Table 7–5 Wear Limits For Compressors
Maximum Wear Before
Factory Maximum Factory Minimum
Part Name Repair
inches mm inches mm inches mm
CYLINDERS
Bore 2.0010 50.8254 .0020 0.0508
Piston (Diameter) 1.9860 50.4444 .0020 0.0508
Piston Pin (Diameter) 0.6873 17.4574 .0010 0.0254
Piston Ring Gap 0.013 00.3302 0.0050 00.1270 .0250 0.6350
Piston Ring Side Clearance 0.002 00.0508 0.0010 00.0254 .0020 0.0508

Table 7–6 Compressor Torque Values

Size Diameter Threads Per Torque Range

Usage
(inches) Inch ft-lb N.m
1/16 27 (pipe) 8 - 12 11 - 16 Pipe Plug - Crankshaft
1/8 20 (pipe) 6 - 10 8 - 13 Oil Return Check Valve - Crankcase
1/4 20 (pipe) 20 - 25 27 - 34 Pipe Plug - Gauge Connection
1/4 20 10 - 12 13 - 16 Connecting Rod cap screw
12 - 15 16 - 20 Baffle Plate - Crankcase
12 - 16 16 - 22 Side Shield
1/4 28
6 - 10 8 - 13 Oil Pump Drive Segment
12 - 16 16 - 22 Unloader Valve
Cover Plate - Plate End
16 - 20 2 - 27 Bearing Head
5/16 18 Terminal Block Cap Screws
Suction Valve
20 - 30 27 - 41
Discharge Valve
Pump End Bearing Head
3/8 16 40 - 50 55 - 70 Bottom Plate - Crankcase Compressor Foot
Cylinder Head
7/16 14 55 - 60 76 - 83 Motor End Cover - Crankcase
5/8 11 25 - 30 34 - 41 Crankshaft
5/8 18 60 - 75 83 - 103 Oil Bypass Plug - Crankcase
#10 32 4-6 5-8 Oil Pump Drive Segment
1-1/2 18 NEF 35 - 45 48 - 62 Oil Level Sight Glass
NEF - National Extra Fine

7–47 T-363
 Table 7–7 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
-40 -40.0 14.8 -40 -40.0 -0.49
-38 -38.9 13.9 -39 -38.2 -0.46
-36 -37.8 13.0 -38 -36.4 -0.43
-34 -36.7 12.0 -37 -34.6 -0.40
-32 -35.6 10.9 -36 -32.8 -0.37
-30 -34.4 9.8 -35 -31.0 -0.34
-28 -33.3 8.7 -34 -29.2 -0.30
-26 -32.2 7.5 -33 -27.4 -0.27
-24 -31.1 6.3 -32 -25.6 -0.23
-22 -30.0 5.0 -31 -23.8 -0.20
-20 -28.9 3.7 -30 -22.0 -0.16
-18 -27.8 2.3 -29 -20.2 -0.12
-16 -26.7 0.8 -28 -18.4 -0.07
-14 -25.6 0.3 -27 -16.6 -0.03
-12 -24.4 1.1 -26 -14.8 0.02
-10 -23.3 1.9 -25 -13.0 0.06
-8 -22.2 2.8 -24 -11.2 0.11
-6 -21.1 3.6 -23 -9.4 0.16
-4 -20.0 4.6 -22 -7.6 0.22
-2 -18.9 5.5 -21 -5.8 0.27
0 -17.8 6.5 -20 -4.0 0.33
2 -16.7 7.5 -19 -2.2 0.39
4 -15.6 8.5 -18 -0.4 0.45
6 -14.4 9.6 -17 1.4 0.51
8 -13.3 10.8 -16 3.2 0.57
10 -12.2 11.9 -15 5.0 0.64
12 -11.1 13.1 -14 6.8 0.71
14 -10.0 14.4 -13 8.6 0.78
16 -8.9 15.7 -12 10.4 0.85
18 -7.8 17.0 -11 12.2 0.93
20 -6.7 18.4 -10 14.0 1.01
22 -5.6 19.9 -9 15.8 1.09
24 -4.4 21.3 -8 17.6 1.17
26 -3.3 22.9 -7 19.4 1.25
28 -2.2 24.5 -6 21.2 1.34
30 -1.1 26.1 -5 23.0 1.43
32 0.0 27.8 -4 24.8 1.53
34 1.1 29.5 -3 26.6 1.62

T-363 7–48
 Table 7–7 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
36 2.2 31.3 -2 28.4 1.72
38 3.3 33.1 -1 30.2 1.82
40 4.4 35.0 0 32.0 1.93
42 5.6 37.0 1 33.8 2.04
44 6.7 39.0 2 35.6 2.15
46 7.8 41.1 3 37.4 2.26
48 8.9 43.2 4 39.2 2.38
50 10.0 45.4 5 41.0 2.50
52 11.1 47.7 6 42.8 2.62
54 12.2 50.0 7 44.6 2.75
56 13.3 52.4 8 46.4 2.88
58 14.4 54.9 9 48.2 3.01
60 15.6 57.4 10 50.0 3.15
62 16.7 60.0 11 51.8 3.29
64 17.8 62.7 12 53.6 3.43
66 18.9 65.4 13 55.4 3.58
68 20.0 68.2 14 57.2 3.73
70 21.1 71.1 15 59.0 3.88
72 22.2 74.1 16 60.8 4.04
74 23.3 77.1 17 62.6 4.21
76 24.4 80.2 18 64.4 4.37
78 25.6 83.4 19 66.2 4.54
80 26.7 86.7 20 68.0 4.72
82 27.8 90.0 21 69.8 4.90
84 28.9 93.5 22 71.6 5.08
86 30.0 97.0 23 73.4 5.27
88 31.1 100.6 24 75.2 5.46
90 32.2 104.3 25 77.0 5.65
92 33.3 108.1 26 78.8 5.85
94 34.4 112.0 27 80.6 6.06
96 35.6 115.9 28 82.4 6.27
98 36.7 120.0 29 84.2 6.48
100 37.8 124.2 30 86.0 6.70
102 38.9 128.4 31 87.8 6.93
104 40.0 132.7 32 89.6 7.15
106 41.1 137.2 33 91.4 7.39
108 42.2 141.7 34 93.2 7.63
110 43.3 146.4 35 95.0 7.87
112 44.4 151.1 36 96.8 8.12

7–49 T-363
 Table 7–7 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
114 45.6 156.0 37 98.6 8.37
116 46.7 160.9 38 100.4 8.63
118 47.8 166.0 39 102.2 8.90
120 48.9 171.2 40 104.0 9.17
122 50.0 176.5 41 105.8 9.44
124 51.1 181.8 42 107.6 9.72
126 52.2 187.4 43 109.4 10.01
128 53.3 193.0 44 111.2 10.30
130 54.4 198.7 45 113.0 10.60
132 55.6 204.6 46 114.8 10.90
134 56.7 210.6 47 116.6 11.21
136 57.8 216.7 48 118.4 11.53
138 58.9 222.9 49 120.2 11.85
140 60.0 229.2 50 122.0 12.18
142 61.1 235.7 51 123.8 12.51
144 62.2 242.3 52 125.6 12.85
146 63.3 249.0 53 127.4 13.20
148 64.4 255.9 54 129.2 13.56
150 65.6 262.9 55 131.0 13.92
56 132.8 14.28
57 134.6 14.66
58 136.4 15.04
59 138.2 15.42
60 140.0 15.82
61 141.8 16.22
62 143.6 16.63
63 145.4 17.04
64 147.2 17.47
65 149.0 17.90

T-363 7–50
Figure 7.41 R-134a Compressor Pressure and Motor Current Curves Vs. Ambient Temperature, Sheet 1

Note: Curves to be used as troubleshooting guide only for model series 69NT40 with
fresh air makeup vent closed, unit powered on 460VAC/60Hz and SMV 100% open.

(Bar) psig
(22.0) 320
(20.7) 300
(19.3) 280
(17.9) 260
35 F (1.7 C)
(16.6) 240 Box
(15.2) 220
(13.8) 200
(12.4) 180
(11.0) 160
(9.7) 140
(8.3) 120
(6.9) 100
(5.5) 80
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ( F)
(15.6) (21.1) (26.7) (32.2) (37.8) (43.3) (48.9) ( C)
Ambient Air Temperature

(Bar) psig
(22.0) 320
(20.7) 300
(19.3) 280
(17.9) 260
(16.6) 240
(15.2) 220
(13.8) 200
(12.4) 180
(11.0) 160
(9.7) 140 0 F (-17.8 C)
(8.3) 120 Box
(6.9) 100
(5.5) 80
60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ( F)
(15.6) (21.1) (26.7) (32.2) (37.8) (43.3) (48.9) ( C)
Ambient Air Temperature

Compressor Discharge Pressure Versus Ambient Air Temperature at Stable Box Temperature

7–51 T-363
 SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams.

Figure 8.1 Legend

LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Dï22) IC INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Tï23)
C CONTROLLER (Cï21) IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï10, Eï13, Gï13, Gï12)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Kï1) IRL INïRANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (Mï16)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER 230V (DVM OPTION) PA CONTACTOR (Kï9, Lï8, Rï6)
TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT (Dï1) PB CONTACTOR (Kï8, Lï9, Rï7)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Lï11, Nï9) PR PROBE RECEPTACLE
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION) (USDA OPTION) (Fï22, Mï23, Nï23, Pï23)
(Aï4) PTC1 PTC FOR VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (Nï19)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Lï10, Rï1) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
CïL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï14) (Lï13, Kï13, Kï16, Lï16)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Gï11, Rï10) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (OPTION) (Cï22)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Eï10, Tï2) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï22)
CPDS COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SENSOR (TEMP) (Bï22) SMV STEPPER MOTOR SUCTION MODULATION
CPSS COMPRESSOR SUCTION SENSOR (TEMP) VALVE (Tï18)
(OPTION), Eï22 SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
CPT CONDENSER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23) (OPTION) (Jï23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Mï2) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Lï23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï5) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Kï5)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï4) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï22)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï4) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Kï10)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï3) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï COMPRESSOR PHASE
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï3) SEQUENCING (Kï8, Kï9)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï5) TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï8) (OPTION) (Eï7)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
(OPTION) (Kï23) FANS (Kï12)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï22) TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Kï14)
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTION) (Eï1) TI CONTROLLER RELAY ï INRANGE RELAY (Kï15)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTION) (Fï3) TF CONTROLLER RELAY ï DEFROST (Kï8)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR TL CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOL LIGHT (Kï13)
HIGH SPEED (Mï12, Nï12, Lï13) TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Kï11)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Eï12, Fï12, Gï12, Tï12, TP TEST POINT (Gï11, Jï12, Hï14, Jï10, Mï17, Hï11)
Tï15)
TR TRANSFORMER (Mï3)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR
TRANS TRANSFORMER AUTO 230/460 (OPTION) (Dï3)
LOW SPEED (Mï13, Nï12)
TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Fï7)
F FUSE (Dï7, Eï21, Fï21, Hï6)
TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
FANS (Kï13)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Hï10)
VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (OPTION) (Nï18)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Lï14, Pï3)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (Eï11)
HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (Gï23)
WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION (Jï11)
HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Gï14)

8–1 T-363
 Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11730

T-363 8–2
Figure 8.3 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

Based on Drawing 62ï11730

8–3 T-363
 Figure 8.4 Unit Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

Based on Drawing 62ï11730

T-363 8–4
 SECTION 9

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, manufacturer: Carrier Transicold Pte Ltd
251 Jalan Ahmad Ibrahim
Singapore 629146

Declare, under our sole responsibility, that the ThinLINE Container Unit:

Model: 69NT40-541
is in conformity with the provisions of the following European Directives:
• "Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC following Annex VIII
• "Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU following Annex II

The assembly was assessed for applicability under the Pressure Equipment Directive, 2014/68/EU, but determined
to be outside of the scope based on the exclusion indicated in PED Article 1, Paragraph 2.f. The assembly was
determined to be no higher than PED Category I and is covered by the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

The following Harmonized Standards were applied for this equipment:

Machinery Directive EMC Directive
EN ISO 12100:2010 EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 60204-1:2006 EN 61000-6-2:2005
EN 13857:2008 EN 55011:2009

The following Technical Standards were applied for this equipment:

• ISO 1496-2:2008

Person established in Europe authorized to compile a copy of the Technical File:

Shaun Bretherton
Service Engineering Manager of CTL Rotterdam
Pittsburgstraat 21 3047 BL Rotterdam
Netherlands

9–1 T-363
 China RoHS per SJ/T 11364-2014

产品中有害物质的名称及含量
有害物质
铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
部件名称 (Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr (VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
金属板部件 O O O O O O
塑料部件 O O O O O O
盘管组件 X O O O O O
加热部件 O O O O O O
马达，压缩机与风扇组件 X O O O O O
温度控制微处理器系统 X O O O O O
断路器与接触器 O O O O O O
变压器 O O O O O O
传感器 X O O O O O
通讯组件 O O O O O O
阀组件 X O O O O O
电缆线/电源 O O O O O O
电池 O O X O O O
标签与绝缘材料 O O O O O O
玻璃部件 X O O O O O
本表格依据 SJ/T 11364 的规定编制。
O：表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求以下。
X：表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求。
62-66122-01, Rev A
 INDEX

Numerics Connection to 190/230VAC Power 5–1

Connection To 380/460 VAC Power 5–1
230 Volt Cable 2–2
Control Box 2–1
460 Volt Cable 2–2 Control Box Section 3–5
Controller 2–1, 4–3, 7–29
A Controller Alarms 4–15
Adding Refrigerant to System 7–6 Controller Configuration Variables 4–24
Adding Refrigerant to System - Partial 7–6 Controller Function Codes 4–26
Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–50
Air-Cooled Condenser Section 3–4 Controller Programming Procedure 7–30
Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) 4–21 Controller Software 4–4
Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–21 Controller Troubleshooting 7–29
Automatic Cold Treatment (Option) 5–11
Automatic Defrost 4–12 D
Autotransformer 2–2, 7–28 DataCORDER 4–16
DataCORDER Alarms 4–23
B DataCORDER Communications 4–22
Back Panels 2–3 DataCORDER Power-Up 4–21
Battery 2–2 DataCORDER Software 4–17
Battery Replacement 7–32 Defrost 4–12
Defrost Initiation 4–13
C Defrost Related Settings 4–14
Dehumidification 2–2
Cable Restraint 2–3 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–21
Check Controller Function Codes 5–5 Display Module 2–3, 4–2
Checking High Pressure Switch 7–14
Checking Superheat 7–24 E
Checking the Controller 7–28
Checking the Refrigerant Charge 7–6 eAutoFresh 2–3
Checking the Stepper Valve 7–27 eAutoFresh Operation 5–4
Communications Interface Module 2–2, 3–5 eAutoFresh Service 7–44
Communications Interface Module Installation 7–45 Electrical Data 3–7
Complete Inspection 5–5 Emergency Bypass 2–3
Compressor 2–1, 7–7 Emergency Bypass Operation (option) 5–7
Compressor Disassembly 7–8 Evacuation and Dehydration 7–4
Compressor Oil Level 7–13 Evacuation and Dehydration, Complete System 7–5
Compressor Reassembly 7–11 Evacuation and Dehydration, General 7–4
Compressor Section 3–3 Evacuation and Dehydration, Partial System 7–5
Condenser Coil 2–1, 7–15 Evacuation and Dehydration, Preparation 7–4
Condenser Coil Cleaning 7–15 Evaporator 2–1
Condenser Coil Installation 7–16 Evaporator Coil & Heater Assembly 7–19
Condenser Coil Preparation 7–16 Evaporator Coil Replacement 7–19
Condenser Coil Removal 7–16 Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly 7–21
Condenser Fan and Fan Motor 7–18 Evaporator Fan Operation 2–2, 4–14
Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace 7–18 Evaporator Section 3–2
Condenser Grille 2–1 Evaporator Section Cleaning 7–22
Condenser Pressure Control 4–14
Configuration Identification 2–1 F
Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4–4 Failure Action 4–14
Connect Power 5–1 Feature Descriptions 2–1
Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle 5–4

Index–1 T-363
Filter-Drier 7–18 P
First Aid 1–1
Perishable Economy 4–7
Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3–1
Perishable Heating 4–6
Frozen “Heat” Mode 4–10
Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4–6
Frozen Economy Mode 4–11
Frozen Idle Mode 4–10 Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation 4–8
Perishable Mode Dehumidification 4–6
Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4–9
Perishable Mode Heating − Sequence of Operation 4–9
Frozen Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation 4–11
Frozen Steady State 4–10 Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4–5
Perishable Pulldown 4–5
Perishable Steady State 4–5
G
Perishable, Dehumidification − Bulb Mode 4–7
GDP Supply and Return Sensor Calibration 7–35 Physical Inspection 5–4
General Description 3–1 Plate Set 2–2
General Safety Notices 1–1 Pressure Readout 2–1
Generator Protection 4–14 Pre-trip Data Recording 4–22
Gutters 2–3 Pre-Trip Diagnostics 4–16, 5–5
Probe Diagnostics 5–7
H Protection Modes of Operation 4–14
Pump the Unit Down 7–3
Handles 2–3
Handling Controller 7–29
High Pressure Switch 7–14 Q
Quest − CCPC 2–2, 4–15
I
Ice Bath Preparation 7–33
R
Inspection (Before Loading) 5–1 Refrigerant Charge 7–6
Interrogator 2–2 Refrigerant Leak Checking 7–4
Introduction 2–1, 9–1 Refrigeration Circuit 3–9
ISO Trip Header 4–24 Refrigeration System Data 3–6
Refrigeration Unit − Front Section 3–1
K Remote Monitoring 2–2
Removal and Replacement of Compressor 7–7
Keypad 4–2
Removing and Installing the Controller 7–31
Replacing High Pressure Switch 7–15
L
Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–21
Labels 2–3
Logging Interval (dCF03) 4–18 S
Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–3
Safety and Protective Devices 3–8
Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) 4–21
M
Section Layout 7–1
Maintenance of Painted Surfaces 7–44 Sensor Checkout Procedure 7–33
Maintenance Precautions 1–1 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 4–17
Manifold Gauge Set 7–1 Sensor Re-Installation 7–43
Megger Testing the Heaters 7–19 Sensor Replacement 7–41
Modes of Operation 4–5 Service Valves 7–2
SMV Emergency Repair Procedure 7–28
O Specific Hazard Statements 1–1
Start Temperature Recorder 5–5
Operating Precautions 1–1
Starting and Stopping Instructions 5–4
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–5
Starting the Unit 5–4
Option Descriptions 2–2
Start-Up Inspection 5–4
Stopping the Unit 5–4

T-363 Index–2
Suction Modulation Valve 7–25

T
Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Temperature Readout 2–1
Temperature Sensor Service 7–32
Thermistor Format (dCF04) 4–18
Thermometer Port 2–3
Thermostatic Expansion Valve 7–23
TXV Replacement 7–24

U
Unit Introduction 2–1
Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–3
Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2
USDA 2–2
USDA Cold Treatment 4–22
USDA Cold Treatment Procedure 4–23

V
Valve Override Controls 7–27
Vent Position Sensor 5–3
Vent Position Sensor (VPS) 7–44

X
XtendFRESH Service 7–44

Index–3 T-363
 Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA

https://www.carrier.com/container-refrigeration